JP6547261B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, for example, pachinko machines and the like have been known as a type of game machine. The pachinko machine is configured to play a game using a game ball, and to have a game area in which the game ball can move, and to guide the game ball fired by the launcher to the game area. In general, pachinko machines are provided with various winning means capable of entering game balls moving in the game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-154110 A

  By the way, among the game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls entered in any winning means and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any prize means Relatively large variations may occur in the ratio, in which case the interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its object is to provide a gaming machine having a function capable of suppressing variation in entering a game ball into winning means. It is to do.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
A state that allows the ball entrance of game ball to move game area, and a first prize means a state can change in the impossible state to preclude ball entrance of game ball,
A state changeable between a permitted state arranged downstream of the first winning means and allowing a game ball moving in the game area to enter the ball and a restricted state restricting the game ball entering the ball 2 winning means,
A first winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first winning means;
And a second winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second winning means,
Despite the first prize means reaches the first ball entrance points that can be ball entrance to the first prize means if said state, since the first prize means was the impossible state the game balls that could not be ball entrance to the first prize means, until the second ball entrance point the second prize means can be ball entrance to the second prize means if the allowable state It has a ball entry guide means for guiding
An accessory provided at a position corresponding to the entry route of the game ball to the first winning means,
The invention is characterized in that it further comprises an accessory driving means capable of changing the state of the bonus according to the winning state of the first winning means .

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the variation in entering the game ball into the winning means.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows 2nd type determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows reach judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows end setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing fluctuation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows common drawing distinction information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for determination etc. of a decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hit display process. It is a perspective view of a 2nd starting winning a prize device. It is a perspective view of a 2nd starting winning a prize device. It is a sectional view of the 2nd starting winning a prize device. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame in a 2nd embodiment, a game board, etc. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus etc. in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a plane schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting winning a prize apparatus as a modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd start winning prize apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a plane schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting winning a prize apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a sectional view showing the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. 47 which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view (front side) of the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 4th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view (rear surface side) of the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 4th embodiment. As a modification of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a top view including the partial cross section for demonstrating the upper surface shape of a shutter, (b) is sectional drawing which shows a 2nd variable winning prize apparatus etc. . It is a front view showing the 2nd variable winning a prize device etc as a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows 2nd variable winning a prize apparatus etc. as a modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board etc. of 5th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the right-handed winning combination etc. of 5th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the right-handed hit winning unit etc. of 5th Embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial section showing a right-hit winning unit of a fifth embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a part of cover unit of a right-turn winning a prize unit of a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view showing an entrance character and the like in a normal position, (b) is a front view showing an entrance character and the like in a high entry ball corresponding position, and (c) is an entrance showing a winning position It is a front view showing character and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed winning switch process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed pending icon display process in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of the decorative symbol display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary perspective view showing an entrance combination etc. as a modification of a 5th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows an entrance combination etc. as a modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an inlet character etc. as a modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decorative symbol display apparatus (pending display area) as a modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decorative symbol display apparatus (pending display area) as a modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decorative symbol display apparatus (pending display area) as a modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decorative symbol display apparatus (pending display area) as a modification of 5th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 etc., the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side of the outer frame 11 is an inside as a game board attachment frame. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the game members (nails, characters, etc.) disposed on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame are omitted.

  In the outer frame 11, as shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the upper side frame forming portion 11a and the lower side frame forming portion 11b are formed of wooden plate members, and the left side frame forming portion 11c and the right side frame forming portion 11d are formed by extrusion of aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are made of a material, and are assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower end portions of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, an extending wall portion 83 is formed on the right side frame forming portion 11d so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction. The extended wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening and closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening and closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 mainly includes a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly releasably supported by the outer frame 11 instead of the inner frame 12.

  Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball tray at the center of the lower portion, and the gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are the lower plate 15 It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removing lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, the left part of the lower plate 15 is provided with an effect button 125 having an LED built-in, and by pressing the effect button 125, the corresponding effect in the decorative symbol display device 42 etc. Or the content of the presentation is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball emission handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") projecting to the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is turned clockwise, the game ball is fired by the launch device 60 as launch means described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of turn operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a release prohibiting button 18 a which can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to turn the handle 18 while prohibiting the game ball from being fired, or to temporarily stop the game ball from being fired while holding the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing game balls and guiding the game balls toward a launcher 60 described later while aligning the game balls in a line. When the upper tray 19 is full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper tray 19. Thereby, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a state where a bill, a card or the like is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) disposed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall etc. Loan balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a pachinko machine in which a game ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are unnecessary.

  Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removing button 123. When the ball release button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicated with the lower plate 15 is opened, and stored in the upper plate 19. The gaming balls are guided to the lower plate 15 (fall). That is, the player can transfer the game balls on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball release button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emission means are controlled to change the light emission mode according to the change of the game state and the like, and play a role in enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102, error indication lamps 104 are provided which are lighted at the time of a predetermined error. In the upper part of each error display lamp 104 in the annular illumination part 102, a large number of fine through holes are formed corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. In the glass unit 137, a pair of conventional front and back rectangular glass plates are not separately attached in a front and back pair but are assembled in a round shape as a whole.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (the resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39, a launcher 60 and a launch rail 61 for guiding gaming balls immediately after being launched by the launcher 60 are attached. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is employed as the launcher 60. Further, a ball feeding device for guiding the gaming balls guided from the upper tray 19 above the launcher 60 to the launch position of the launcher 60 one by one by driving of a built-in drive means (e.g. solenoid) 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game board 30, the general winning opening 31, the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, the first start winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable display unit 35, the first 1 Special display device 43L, second special display device 43R, fluctuation identification lamp 40 and the like are provided. As is well known, when the game ball enters (prizes) various winning openings such as general winning opening 31, variable winning devices 32a, 32b, start winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out to the plate 15.

  In the present embodiment, if there is a ball entry into the general winning opening 31, then 10 pieces, if there is a 14 ball entry into the first variable prize device 32a, 14 pieces into the second variable prize device 32b. If there is a ball, then 13 game balls. If there is a ball entry into the first start winning device 33a, 2 pieces. If there is a ball entry into the second start winning device 33b, 1 game ball. Is configured to be paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (which is discharged to the back side of the game board 30) which does not enter the ball only by passing the game ball, the payout of the game ball is not performed. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b constitutes a variable winning device, the second start winning device 33b constitutes a special starting device, and the through gate 34 constitutes a normal starting device.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and the game ball that did not win in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 etc. It is discharged through the game area. Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  A variable display unit 35 is disposed substantially in the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is disposed on the variable display unit 35 so as to surround a decorative symbol display unit 42 described later.

  A ball entry port 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and the game ball entered into the ball entry port 151 is a decorative pattern through the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game balls guided on the stage 153 roll on the stage 153 and fall from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or extend back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 to play the game balls. It falls into the lead-out groove 154 which guides to the front.

  At a lower position of the variable display unit 35, a first start winning device 33a is disposed. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front part of the gaming board 30, and on the upper side of the first starting winning device 33a is a winning opening through which the game ball can always win. In particular, the gaming ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a with relatively high probability. The first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an open / close member for changing the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. In the first variable winning device 32a, normally, the game ball is in the closed state where the game ball can not win, and in the case of the jackpot state of the corresponding type, the game ball is in the open state where the game can be won. Although not shown, the first variable winning device 32a has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a high winning shutter for opening and closing the high winning opening, and a high winning for operating the high winning shutter. The first variable winning device is provided with a solenoid for mouth and a first count switch 223a for detecting game balls entering the big winning opening, and driving control of the solenoid for big winning opening and opening and closing the big winning shutter. 32a (big winning opening) is switched to the closed state and the open state.

  Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the area located on the left side of the variable display unit 35 in the game area is referred to as the “left side area”, and the area located on the right side of the variable display unit 35 is referred to as the “right side area”. In addition, on the downstream side of the left side area, the area located on the left side of the approximate center of the game board 30 where the first start winning device 33a and the first variable winning device 32a are arranged A region located on the right side of the substantially central portion of the game board 30 in the left / right direction on the downstream side of the right side region is referred to as a “lower right region”.

  At the lower part of the lower left area, three general winning openings 31 are disposed obliquely at predetermined intervals along the peripheral portion (inner rail forming portion 51) of the game area. Each general winning opening 31 protrudes forward from the front part of the gaming board 30, and on the upper side thereof, a winning opening through which gaming balls can always be won is opened.

  A through gate 34 is disposed in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, an entrance support lottery as to whether or not the second start winning device 33b to be described later is opened is performed in detail, and the normal symbol display device 41 is displayed. And a variable display for teaching the result of the entry support lottery. Then, when winning in the entry support lottery, the second starting winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

  Furthermore, a second variable winning device 32 b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side area. In the second variable winning device 32b, normally, the game ball is in the closed state where the game ball can not win, and in the case of the jackpot state of the corresponding type, the game ball is in the open state where the game can be won. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a high winning shutter for opening and closing the high winning opening, and a high winning for operating the high winning shutter. The second variable winning device is provided with a solenoid for the mouth and a second count switch 223b for detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening, and driving control of the solenoid for the big winning opening and opening and closing the big winning shutter. 32b (big winning opening) is switched to the closed state and the open state.

  By the way, the big winning shutters of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment have the lower edge of the big winning shutter pivotally supported along the lower edge of the big winning opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the big winning shutter extends vertically to close the big winning opening, and the gaming ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning device 32a, 32b, the big winning shutter pivots forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), The game ball which has flowed forward is received on the back surface (upper surface) of the big winning shutter and is guided to the big winning opening.

  A second start winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the second variable winning device 32b in the lower right region. The second start winning device 33b is also configured to be changeable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter. The details of the second start winning device 33b will be described later.

  Although details will be described later, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b, respectively, for detecting the winning game balls. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot state etc. is performed, and special display devices 43L, 43R (and decorative symbol display described later) The variable display is performed by the device 42). Then, when the player wins in the lottery, a jackpot state or the like in which the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won at a predetermined probability in a success lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won at a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning lottery. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a start winning shutter 405 as an opening and closing member for opening and closing a second start winning device 33b (start winning opening 402 described later). In the mode, the start winning shutter 405 is opened relatively frequently, and it becomes easy to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning device 33 b. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, a state in which the low probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as a "normal mode", a state in which the low probability state and the high ball entry state are referred to as a "time shortening mode", a high probability state and a high ball entry state A certain state is referred to as a “probability change mode”, and a state in which the high probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as a “latency mode”.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, while the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L even if the jackpot state does not occur, When the variable display in the 43 R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the process is ended, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In the definite change mode or the time shortening mode, the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently and it is easy to enter the ball, but the ball for the first start winning device 33a is entered. Since it is not easy to do so, when the player enters the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, the player will shoot the game ball toward the right side area (a so-called "right hit"). In addition, at the timing of such a right strike, an announcement prompting a right strike is made in the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a (so-called "navel") and a second start winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip") The type of winning is changed depending on the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the electric ball,) (type determination referred to when determining the type of winning state) Tables are configured differently).

  More specifically, as a jackpot type when winning a jackpot state based on entering the first start winning device 33a, 16 round probability variation big hit (hereinafter referred to as "16 RS"), 8 round probability variation big hit ( Hereinafter, "8 RS" is referred to, 8 rounds usually hit (hereinafter "8 RN"), and 2 round probability variation big hits (hereinafter referred to as "2 RS"). With regard to “16 RS”, “8 RS” and “8 RN”, eight first variable winning devices 32 a are opened for 30 seconds, or eight first variable winning devices 32 a after first variable winning device 32 a is opened The game ball enters the ball one round, and it is repeated 16 times for "16 RS", 8 times for "8 RS" and "8 RN", and the jackpot state ends . On the other hand, regarding "2RS", the jackpot state is ended after the first variable winning device 32a is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. That is, with regard to “16 RS”, “8 RS”, “8 RN”, although “2 RS” is a game ball, although it is a big hit (so-called “out ball with a big hit”) where a significant increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state. It has become a jackpot (so-called, "No balls out jackpot") that can not be expected to significantly increase.

  In addition, "probability change mode" is given after the big hit state of "16 RS" and "8 RS", "latency mode" is given after the big hit state of "2 RS", and after the big hit state of "8 RN" The “time reduction mode” (90 times of variable display in this example) is provided. That is, after the big hit state of “16 RS”, “8 RS” and “8 RN” is finished, the second start winning device 33 b is in a high entry state where it is easy to be opened. It will cause the ball to fire. In the present embodiment, if the player wins a big hit in the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, the ratio of 5% will be "16 RS" and the ratio of 55% will be "8 RS" and 30%. Then it becomes “8 RN” and it becomes “2 RS” at 10% rate.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small hit is won in a lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a. If the player wins a small hit in the winning or not based on entering the first start winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. From the small hit state ends. That is, regarding the first variable winning device 32a, the appearance is the same as "2RS". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, when “2 RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent confirmation mode, but the normal mode is continued even if the small winning is won. As a result, in the lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, the first variable prize can be obtained even without performing a distribution such that a high probability state is not awarded to a 2 round jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) It is possible to avoid a situation in which the device 32a is opened twice in a short time and it is found that the device 32a has shifted to the high probability state.

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type when winning in the jackpot state based on entering the second starting winning device 33b, 16 round probability variation big hit, 8 round probability variation big hit, 2 round normal big hit (hereinafter "2 RN" Say)). When the player wins the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is released instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round ends) Although the conditions are the same, although the number of payouts (14 and 13) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b respectively is different, for convenience of description, the second start winning device 33b The same names (“16 RS” and “8 RS”) will be used for convenience also for the type of jackpot when winning in the lottery based on entering the ball. In addition, in the present embodiment, the round end condition of the big hit state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition of the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. It may be different (for example, the upper limit of the game balls in the round is eight and nine).

  Further, regarding "2RS", the jackpot state ends after the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. That is, regarding "16RS" and "8RS", although a significant increase in gaming balls can be expected during the jackpot state, "2RN" is a jackpot where a significant increase in gaming balls can not be expected.

  In addition, after the jackpot state of “2 RN” ends, “time shortening mode” is given. In this example, “2 RN” is divided into three, and “2 RN 30” to which a time shortening mode for 30 times of variable display is given and “2 RN 60” to which a time shortening mode for 60 times for variable display is given There is "2 RN 90" to which a time shortening mode for 90 times of display is given. In the present embodiment, if the player wins a big hit in the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b, the ratio of 35% becomes "16 RS", and the ratio of 35% is "8 RS", 20% Thus, “2 RN 30” is obtained, “2 RN 60” is obtained at a rate of 5%, and “2 RN 90” is obtained at a rate of 5%.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a small hit may be won in a lottery based on entering the ball to the second starting winning device 33b. If the player wins a small hit in the winning or losing lottery based on entering the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. From the small hit state ends. That is, regarding the second variable winning device 32b, the appearance is the same as "2 RN". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, a high probability state such as the probability change mode basically shifts to the low probability state (time shortening mode etc.) by winning "2 RN", but even if it wins a small hit in the probability change mode, the probability change The mode is continued. As a result, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice in a short time without performing distribution to win a two-round probability variation big hit "2RS" in a winning lottery based on entering the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to avoid the situation where it is understood that it has shifted to the low probability state by all means.

  In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and the first teaching the result of the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b The 2 special display devices 43R are respectively configured by two segment display devices, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at positions which can be viewed by the player (in this example, positions where the game balls in the left side area can not pass).

  Then, in response to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a, the switching display (variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b The switch display (variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the second special display device 43R upon entering the ball. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later.

  Moreover, after the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning or losing lottery, that is, the "big hit", "by the special symbol when the variation display is stopped. It is clearly displayed that "small hit" or "out". For example, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol (combination of segments to be lit) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variation display) And, when a predetermined time has passed, any special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, in the case of winning the "big hit" in the lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the change is stopped, and a big hit state occurs.

  Furthermore, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the special symbol to be stopped, a jackpot type, that is, "16 RS", "8 RS", "8 RN", "2 RS", or "2 RN" is also taught. Ru. In addition, there are a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, not one, and any one of them is selected and the stop display is performed. When one of the first special display device 43L and the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or decision display, the other is turned off (“-” is displayed. If neither the variable display nor the determination display is performed, “−” is displayed on both of them.

  Also, when the game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display of that amount is It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). The maximum number of times of the suspended variable display is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b In response to the game balls, up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are suspended.

  Further, the number of pending variable display (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of gaming balls to the first start winning device 33a is disposed above the first special display device 43L, and is blue The number of pending display of fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "second fluctuation display") based on entering of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is indicated by lighting up by the first holding lamp 46a that can emit light. 2) It is arranged above the special display device 43R, and is lit and displayed by the second storage lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same manner as the first variable display and the second variable display, and the same number as the number of the first variable display or the second variable display is provided. Light. The display contents of the storage lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub control device 262 as sub control means described later. When the game ball newly wins the start-up winning units 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display for that portion is also suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of suspension of the variable display based on the entry of the game ball to the start winning device 33a, 33b is also displayed in the decorative symbol display device 42 (when the variable display is performed, the screen It will be displayed at the bottom).

  In addition, although the suspended variable display is basically to be digested in the suspended order, when both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended (storage lamp 46a, In the case where one or more light sources 46b are lit, the second variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second start winning device 33b is not all digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and the second hold lamp 46b is turned on while the first hold lamp 46a is turned on, the first variation display is delayed. The second variable display is performed first.

  In the variation identification lamp 40, which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b corresponds to the variation display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (No. 1 It is for indicating which one of the (1) variable display and the second (2) variable display), and is disposed at a position (in this example, a position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) visible to the player. The variation identification lamp 40 includes an LED of blue emission color and an LED of red emission color, and emits blue when the first variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the second variation is generated. It emits red light when the display is being performed.

  In the variable display unit 35, the fluctuation display by the normal symbol display device 41 (upper position of the stage 153 of the center frame 47) and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, which are variably displayed triggered by the passage of the through gate 34 A decorative symbol display device 42 is provided which is variably displayed in accordance with the above.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "o" or "x" as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the gate 34, for example, the normal symbol "o"-> "x" → The display is switched at high speed (variation display) in the order of “o” →. Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with the symbol "o" (winning symbol), the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is in the open state only for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when the game ball newly passes through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of that amount is after the end of the fluctuation display being performed at that time It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). Although the maximum number of times of the variable display of the normal symbol to be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of times is held up to 4 times. In addition, the number of suspension of the variation display of the normal symbol is disposed in the variable display unit 35, and is lit and displayed by the storage lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The holding lamps 44 are provided four each similarly to the maximum holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and are lit by the same number as the number of the variable displays being held.

  In addition, as a high entering state, for example, (1) a state where the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low entering state, (2) one open time of the second start winning device 33b ( (3) The specified number of game balls that can enter the ball for one opening of the second start winning device 33b is longer than in the low ball state, (4) The number of opening times of the second starting winning device 33b per winning of the entry support lottery is larger than that in the low entry state, (5) The winning probability of the entry support selection is from the low entry state It is also possible to keep it high. The high ball entry state in the present embodiment adopts the configurations of the above (1), (2) and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to win frequently with respect to the second start winning device 33b, and the number of times the winning or losing lottery is executed increases, and the ball has a good state of possession with the reduction of the player's ball reduced. .

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display a decorative symbol as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R. The display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  For example, the upper, middle, lower three symbol display areas are provided in the decorative symbol display device 42, and in each of the symbol display areas, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers 1 to 9 attached) The decorative symbols are displayed in sequence (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region) in a sequential order (variation display) and then stopped. . For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined in main controller 261, the display corresponding to the jackpot is made on first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the decoration symbol is displayed on jackpot in decoration symbol display device 42. Stop display is displayed in the combination corresponding to (for example, the upper decorative pattern display area, the middle graphic display region, and the decorative symbols variably displayed in the lower graphic display region are lined up on the predetermined effective line ) And the jackpot state is started.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the big hit, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower pattern display region as the previous step. Thus, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state in which the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach condition occurs does not necessarily lead to a big hit, but it may go off.

  In this embodiment, after the reach state occurs, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region in the middle symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If it is (when Zoro eyes are stopped and displayed), a jackpot state is given. Moreover, in the case of odd number Zorozu, "16RS" or "8RS" generate | occur | produces, and in the case of even Zorozu, either "16RS", "8RS", or "8RN" generate | occur | produces.

  Basically, combinations of decorative designs other than Zorozu teach “disengagement”, but in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is “2RS” or “2RN”, the decorative design is “Zoro” Instead of being displayed as a stop in combination, it is displayed as a stop in combination that becomes the reach of the symbol. In addition, the "small hit" is also displayed as a stop in the combination that becomes the reach symbol but it becomes a deviation.

  For example, in the probability change mode, a dedicated probability change stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode (indicating the staying game mode), but winning "2 RN" causes a probability change When the mode ends, or when the player wins a "small hit", such a definite change stage is ended, and a pullback stage is displayed in which it can not be determined whether or not the definite change mode is set. Then, when “2 RN” is won and the period of the granted time shortening mode is also ended, the pulling back stage is ended, and the normal mode (very likely) is indicated. Start displaying the stage. If the player wins the "small hit", since there is no change in the game mode before and after the "small hit", the probability change mode remains. Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to win a jackpot, and furthermore, if it exceeds the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (90 times of variation display of special symbol), it is grasped that it is the definite change mode be able to.

  In addition, as mentioned above, the correspondence between the stop pattern of the special symbol in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the jackpot type is grasped, and the stop pattern of the special symbol variation display which taught the occurrence of the big hit or the small hit is confirmed If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot was won. In addition, in the case of winning a big hit by the lottery that is performed based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, as a big hit type to display the Zoro eye in the decorative symbol display device 42 "16RS" and "8RS" There is only. For this reason, basically (with the exception of the case where the variable display corresponding to the entering of the first start winning device 33a which has been suspended is digested) in the decoration symbol display device 42 in the definite variation mode or the time shortening mode When the jackpot instruction is given, the assignment of the definite variation mode is determined.

  Also, for example, in the normal mode, the normal stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode, but when “2 RS” is won to shift to the probability change mode or “small hit” When the player wins the "", the normal stage ends, and a precursor stage in which it can not be determined whether the mode is the definite change mode is displayed. In this embodiment, when the "small hit" is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode, this precursor stage is a variable symbol of a special symbol, and a period of about 10 to 50 times. After being derived at, it is usually returned to the stage. On the other hand, when "2RS" is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent mode, it is basically a precursor stage until a big hit. It should be noted that a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to return to the normal stage from the precursor stage, or to return to the precursor stage again after returning to the normal stage from the precursor stage (in the case of the latent mode , It is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage). In addition, in the case of winning the "8 RN" in the lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and although it was elected "8 RS", a definite change mode is granted until the end of the jackpot state When the jackpot state is not taught, the process moves to the pullback stage after the end of the jackpot state.

  Further, on the game board 30, there are attached rails 50 for guiding the game balls fired from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30, which are composed of an inner rail structure 51 and an outer rail structure 52. As a result, the game balls fired in response to the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the firing rails 61 and the rails 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming balls guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area once return to the inside of the rail 50 again. Further, a rubber return 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail configuration portion 52. The game ball fired with a predetermined momentum or more strikes the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is disconnected at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is disconnected at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball launched by the launcher 60 passes back the rail 50 until it passes the return ball preventing member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail configuration parts 51 and 52 are removed from the game area It is eaten.

  In the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is characterized. The second start winning device 33b will be mainly described below with reference to FIGS. The second start winning device 33b is formed substantially in a box formed with a base plate 401 attached along the front surface of the game board 30, and a start winning opening 402 formed to protrude on the front side of the base plate 401 and opening upward. -Shaped winning box 403, a second start winning switch 224b (see FIG. 40) for detecting the gaming ball entering the starting winning opening 402, and closing for disabling entry of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 402 A start winning shutter 405 movable between a position and an open position for entering a ball, a solenoid (not shown) for operating the start winning shutter 405, and guiding the gaming ball toward the start winning opening 402 A guide stand 407 is provided. In the present embodiment, the start winning hole 402 corresponds to the specific winning hole, and the start winning shutter 405 and a solenoid for operating the start winning shutter 405 constitute an open / close member.

  The start winning combination shutter 405 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a play area is formed on the base plate 401 directly above the start winning combination opening 402 (hereinafter referred to as "accommodation opening 408"). The opening and closing winning opening 402 is opened and closed. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 39, in the open state of the second start winning device 33b, the entire start winning shutter 405 is accommodated at the back side of the housing opening 408, and as shown in FIG. In the closed state of 33 b, the entire start winning hole 402 is covered by the starting winning shutter 405. Further, both sides of the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 in the state where the start winning opening 402 is closed and the front edge thereof are supported by the peripheral edge of the starting winning opening 402. In the present embodiment, the peripheral edge portion of the start winning hole 402 supporting the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 constitutes a receiving member. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is formed on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405.

  The guide stand 407 is disposed at the upper right of the start winning opening 402, and the gaming ball that has reached the second starting winning device 33b from the upstream side of the game area is viewed from a substantially fixed direction with respect to the starting winning opening 402. In the above, it is provided to guide from the upper right. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the second start winning device 33 b is configured by various game members such as game nails disposed above the second start winning device 33 b and special effects for decoration. The movement route of the game ball is limited so that the game ball which has reached to the first must enter the guide stand 407 first. That is, the gaming ball entering the second start winning device 33b (possibly having the possibility of entering the starting winning opening 402) always jumps out of the guide stand 407 toward the upper position of the start winning shutter 405 located on the lower left. It is supposed to work. In the present embodiment, the position at which the gaming ball is guided by the guide stand 407 and jumps out corresponds to a specific point, and the start winning shutter 405 is disposed at the specific point.

  Furthermore, various game members guiding the game balls to the guide stand 407 are configured such that the momentum of the game balls reaching the guide stand 407 can be suppressed as much as possible (for example, the guide face is not steep but gentle slope near horizontal direction Etc.). As a result, the speed, pop-out angle, etc. of the game ball guided by the guide stand 407 are approximated as much as possible. In the present embodiment, the guide stand 407 and a game nail, a decorative role, etc. for guiding the game ball to the guide stand 407 constitute a rectifying means.

  Between the winning box 403 and the guide stand 407, an opening through which the game ball can pass (hereinafter referred to as a "discharge opening 411") is provided. That is, gaming balls that do not enter the start winning hole 402 are discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33 b through the discharge opening 411.

  By the way, on the upper surface side of the winning box 403, an introduction path 412 is formed adjacent to the left of the start winning opening 402 for guiding the gaming ball backward (the back side of the game board 30). That is, when the start winning opening 402 is closed by the start winning shutter 405 (the second start winning device 33 b is in the closed position), the game is guided to the starting winning opening 402 from the upper right by the guide stand 407 The ball is restricted from winning into the starting winning opening 402 by the starting winning shutter 405 and passes the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 by the momentum guided from the guide stand 407 and is adjacent to the left of the starting winning shutter 405 It enters into the introduction path 412 which

  The top surface of the start winning shutter 405 and the introduction path 412 of this embodiment are inclined downward to the right, but the game balls guided from the guide stand 407 are guided so that they can move up and run. The tilt, length, relative position, etc. of the table 407 are designed.

  Further, the base plate 401 is formed with an opening communicating with the introduction path 412 (hereinafter referred to as “detour opening 413”). The bypass opening 413 is formed between the introduction path 412 and the left portion of the start winning opening 402.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the base plate 401, a turn box 415 provided with a re-entry path 414 for releasing the gaming ball having entered the detour opening 413 from the introduction path 412 above the start winning opening 402 is attached. ing. The re-entry path 414 is constituted by an outward path 416 on the left side and a return path 417 on the right side at the central portion in the width direction of the turn box 415. The rear ends of the forward path 416 and the return path 417 are continuous, but on the front side of the rear path, a partition rib 418 is formed so as not to allow passage between the forward path 416 and the return path 417. The forward passage 416 is continuous with the introduction passage 412 via the bypass opening 413 and is inclined rearward and to the right. The return path 417 is continuous with the rear portion of the forward path 416 and is connected to the bypass opening 413 located immediately above the start winning hole 402 and is inclined forward.

  When the flow of gaming balls in the second start winning device 33b is confirmed, first, when the gaming balls guided to the guide stand 407 and jumped out to the start winning opening 402 reach the top right of the starting winning opening 402 When the start winning opening 402 is opened, the gaming ball jumps into the opening start winning opening 402 which is opened as it is to be won, and is detected by the second start winning switch 224b.

  On the other hand, when the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning shutter 405 when the gaming ball guided by the guide stand 407 and jumping out to the starting winning opening 402 reaches just above the starting winning opening 402 When the game ball lands on the top surface of the start winning shutter 405, the game ball moves leftward and enters the introduction path 412. Furthermore, from the introductory path 412, it will jump out above the start winning opening 402 via the re-entry path 414 again. At this time, if the start winning opening 402 is opened, it will win in the starting winning opening 402. On the other hand, if the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the start winning shutter 405, the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 It is guided to the lower right and discharged from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second starting winning device 33b.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, in the high entry state in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is substantially open (the start winning opening 402 is substantially open). ing). For example, in the high entering state, the winning probability of the entry support lottery is 99/100, and the variation display time of the normal symbol displaying the result of the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and the entry support lottery is won , 4 seconds opening is repeated 3 times with 0.4 seconds closing period. For this reason, even if the start winning opening 402 is accidentally closed when jumping out from the guide stand 407 and positioned immediately above the starting winning opening 402, the starting winning opening again through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. When reaching directly above 402, it is very likely that the start winning opening 402 is open. In this embodiment, the time from the guide stand 407 to the top of the start winning opening 402 via the top surface of the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 is approximately one second. ~ 2 seconds are assumed.

  Furthermore, even if a predetermined game ball tries to rush into the start winning opening 402 a second time, even if the start winning shutter 405 is closed and the start winning opening 402 can not be won, the game ball is started. If it is on the upper surface of the winning shutter 405, the starting winning opening 402 will be entered. In particular, in the present embodiment, the return path 417 of the re-entry path 414 is located on the upstream left side of the top surface of the start winning shutter 405 inclined downward toward the discharge opening 411 on the right side. The left end of the start winning opening 402 is connected. Therefore, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position when the game ball jumps out of the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the game ball is kept for a relatively long time (start winning shutter It is configured to stay on the start winning shutter 405 by rolling a long distance as much as possible from the left side to the right side of the upper surface 405.

  Therefore, in the high ball entry state, almost all game balls will enter the start winning hole 402 of the second start winning device 33b when the player strikes a right. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out is one when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (when the detection of the game ball by the second start winning switch 224b is performed) However, the probability change mode and the time reduction mode can be enjoyed without substantially reducing the player's game balls. In addition, since the suspension of the change display of the special symbol is almost uninterrupted, the game can be advanced with ease.

  On the other hand, in the low ball entry state, the winning probability of the entry support lottery is 1/100, the variation display time of the normal symbol is 8 seconds, and 0.4 seconds of opening is 1 when winning the entry support lottery. It is done only once. For this reason, even if "right-handed" is performed in the normal mode or the latent determination mode, the game ball is made to enter the second start winning device 33b, and it is almost impossible to expect to receive a winning lottery. Therefore, in the normal mode or the latent probability mode, the game ball with the firing strength such that the game ball flows in the "left side area" on the left side of the variable display unit 35 for the purpose of entering the first start winning device 33a. Will be fired (“hit left”). By the way, in this embodiment, when the game ball is hit “left”, the game ball can not be entered into the second variable winning device 32 b and the second start winning device 33 b, and the game ball is through gate. 34 can not pass through. Furthermore, when the game ball is "right-handed", the game ball can not be entered into the first variable winning device 32a and the first start winning device 33a.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33 b is provided on the downstream side of the game area than the second variable winning device 32 b. Further, in the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 32b is opened, almost all the game balls moving in the right side area are blocked by the shutter of the second variable winning device 32b, and the second variable winning device 32b The device 32b is to be awarded. Therefore, during the round of the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the game balls hardly flow toward the second start winning device 33b.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning combination shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 constitute time difference passing opportunity giving means. Further, the entry support lottery corresponds to the opening and closing lottery, the first state corresponds to the low entry state, and the second state corresponds to the high entry state. Further, the function of the main control unit 261, which will be described later in detail, performs an entrance support lottery, and constitutes an open / close lottery means.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 to the upper tray 19. Further, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail forming portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thus, if the game ball launched from the launcher 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and returns the rail 50 back as a far ball, the far ball is moved to the lower tray 15 through the far ball passage 72. Exhausted.

  Further, reference numeral 67 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 is a payout passage for guiding the gaming balls paid out by the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by an urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end on the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71. The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 become full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication passage 71 side (the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71 overflows), It will be dispensed to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a fullness detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. By the presence of the full detection switch, it is determined that the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls (the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls and the gaming balls are stagnant in the lower plate communication path 71) be able to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using the display, the voice, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 42 Control is performed. In addition, the stagnation of the gaming ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated, and when the gaming ball is not detected by the fullness detection switch (when it is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

  Next, the rear face configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged up and down, right and left so as to be partially overlapped in front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. And protective covers made of resin are attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, so that unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" herein.

  First, the rear face configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole at the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind 213 is provided to project rearward. In addition, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45 and the sub control device 262 can be detached Is attached to

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42 a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface of the frame cover 213 It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub controller 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262 a and fixed to the back side of the display controller 45 (substrate box 45 a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving an LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

  Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, a substrate box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member can not be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. Thus, it can be easily found that the substrate box 263 has been tampered with.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch for detecting the game ball having entered the various winning openings, corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are provided with a first count switch. A second count switch 223b is provided. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. A 1-board relay board is provided. The first board relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like to the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results respectively detected by the various ball entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the payout number of gaming balls) according to the winning situation in each case is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are calculated based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, on the back of the game board 30, although not shown, there is provided a winning opening solenoid for opening the winning opening with the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b. There is provided a winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the start winning shutter 405 by the start winning device 33b. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) for relaying these solenoids and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin molded back pack 351 and a payout mechanism portion 352 of the game ball. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened backward with the open and close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a hall computer or the like of the game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, although the code is not attached, for example, a terminal for outputting information related to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability change mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by the open detection switch 91, 92 described later Terminals for outputting information on the opening of 12; terminals for outputting information on various error conditions such as a ball entry error, lower bowl full error, tank ball no error, payout error, etc .; an award to be paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, an ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 together. Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the substrate box 263 and the terminal portion (substrate side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The dispensing mechanism portion 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and gaming balls supplied from an island facility of the game hall are successively supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, there is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the lateral direction and which slopes gently toward the downstream side, and further, on the downstream side of the tank rail 356, a case rail 357 longitudinally. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

  In addition, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism portion 352, and a power switch board 382 for fetching the main power from the outside is installed. There is. A main power of, for example, 24 V AC is supplied to the power switch substrate 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382 a.

  Under the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-described ball collection mechanism flow, and the game ball is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the gaming balls having won in the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 also communicates with the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that did not win in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are separately formed and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, the dispensing control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be removed Is attached to

  The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for the sake of convenience, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed substrate).

  In addition, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the substrate box 311 a and fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313 a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). A sealing member is provided in the substrate box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is accommodated, and an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection substrate 314 is accommodated in the substrate box 314a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be viewed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state recovery switch 321 which protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed at the occurrence of a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor unit, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and maintains the state at the time of the power failure even when the power failure occurs, and may restore the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (power recovery) it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of business in the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored, so when returning to the initial state when the power is turned on Throw in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and one side is rotated by one. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 covering the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of the outer frame 11, and to operate the locking device 600 by the said wire etc. As a result, defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extension wall 83 covers the right end (the end on the left side in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12 The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 can not be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the front lower right portion (right side of the launcher 60) of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right rear portion (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be inserted into and withdrawn from the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided such that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided such that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main unit, the on signal is output to the main control device 261, and the detection unit is pressed to the switch main unit side and in the state of being retracted into the switch main unit It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back of the front frame set 14 and turned off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the projecting state. It will be on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed on the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to be turned off, and detection is performed when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the projecting state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main substrate) as a main control means is mounted with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 storing various control programs to be executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area in which values such as various flags, counters, and I / O are stored. And a backup area 503a.

  In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a includes a power-off time (including a power-down occurrence) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off. The same is an area for storing values such as stack pointers, registers, and I / O. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure cancellation). Is executed in A power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542 described later is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. The occurrence of the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

  If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input / output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543 to be described later, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, various switches of winning opening switch 221, count switches 223a and 223b, start winning switches 224a and 224b, through gate switch 225, and handle 18 are provided at input / output port 505. Etc., various substrates, and various electric parts such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, although the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (substrate side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions and the like.

  The sub control unit 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc., the input / output port 554, the bus line 555, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data transmission / reception circuit, etc. Is equipped. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, and the RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected. Further, to the input / output port 554, the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46a and 46b, the effect button 125, various electric decoration parts, and the lamps 102 to 104 are connected.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are configured to display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262 In the decorative symbol display device 42 that is controlled, the variable display (of the decorative symbol) is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable display of (the special symbol in) the special display devices 43L, 43R.

  Further, the payout control device 311 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing a control program to be executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and data can be held (backup), and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a is a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and so on, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This area is for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. As in the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout control of the winning balls by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer in which the command sent from the device is stored.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the winning balls, and is turned on when the specific command for permitting the payout of the winning balls is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and the initialization is performed. It is turned off when it is restored before processing or power off. In this embodiment, a specific command is a payout initialization command that instructs initialization processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a winning ball command that instructs payout of a winning ball, and the main control device 261 is restored. There are three of the payout return commands sent in case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received, and similar to the payout permission flag, processing of initial setting or power off It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and turned off when determination of the command received by the command determination process is performed.

  The command buffer is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, it is stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input / output port 515 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312, a payout device 358, and the like.

  The card unit connection board 314 is a ball operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. , And are electrically connected to each other, and take in a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. The card unit connection board 314 can be omitted in a cash machine in which the game balls are directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from the ball lending device or the like without passing through the card unit.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the release control signal 311 outputs a release permission signal, the player detects that the handle 18 is touched by a sensor signal, and the release prohibition button 18a for stopping the release The launch device 60 is driven on the condition that the game ball is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the gaming ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And have. The input port 527 is connected to an input / output port 554 of the sub controller 262. The CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and to the output port 529, a decorative symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 526 should be referred to as a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. The +12 V power supply, the +5 V power supply, and the backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like. An operation power supply (+12 V power supply, +5 V power supply, etc.) is supplied to the emission control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to occurrence of power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The blackout signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the power failure process even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can execute and complete the power failure processing normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (including the power on due to a power failure cancellation) while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. Ru.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as a main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a random number counter C1 used for a lottery for determining whether a jackpot state is to be generated, a type determination counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type (class lottery), and decoration Fluctuation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not reach condition is generated in symbol display device 42, initial value random number counter CINI used to set initial value of pass / fail random number counter C1, and first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) used for lottery of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used to determine the variation display time etc. of the normal symbol display device 41 (ball support support lottery) It is decided to use the normal symbol random number counter C4. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery of reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is detached and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and the variation time, ie, the presentation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

  The counters C 1, C 2, C 3, C INI, CS 1, CS 2, C 4 are loop counters which return 1 to the previous value each time they are updated and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 has a special variation suspension area as a suspension storage area in which the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 are stored, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored A change holding area is provided. The normal change pending area is provided with one execution area and four pending areas (pending first to pending fourth areas). In each reserve area of the ordinary variation reserve area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passage history of the gaming ball to the through gate 34. By adopting the configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  Further, the special variation reserve area includes a first special variation reserve area and a second special variation storage area each including four reserve areas (preserve first to reserve fourth area), and one execution area. In each reserve area of the first special variation reserve area, each value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the gaming ball to the first starting winning device 33a. It is stored in series. In each reserve area of the second special variation reserve area, each value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b. It is stored in series. By adopting the configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R up to four times.

  Describing each of the counters in detail, the success / failure random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 599) as the closing value, and then 0 which is the lower limit as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Usually, when the pass / fail random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once every timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the yes / no random number counter C1 stored in the yes / no random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation reserve area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the random number counter C1 that becomes the big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”, and the high probability In the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), the number of the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the value is “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, two success / failure determination tables that are referred to when determining whether the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 corresponds to the big hit are provided in the ROM 502, and the “7, 307” is hit heavily There is a first success / failure determination table stored as a value, and a second success / failure determination table stored as “8-16, 308-316” as a jackpot value.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is used, if the jackpot is not won, a lottery is performed to determine whether the jackpot is won or not. In the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode), the number of the value of the random number counter C1 which is small hit is one, the value is "404", and the high probability state (probability change mode, latency mode) In the case of), the number of values of the random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and its value is "404 to 413". Note that the first small hit determination table storing "404" as a winning value and the second small hit determination table storing "405 to 413" as a winning value are referred to for the small hit success / failure determination.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery (big hit probability) is 1/300, the probability of winning in a small hit (small hit probability) is 1/600, The fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) takes 0.4 seconds when winning in the ball entry support lottery. It is released.

  In the probability variation mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the small hitting probability is 1/60, which makes it easier for the player to hit a jackpot or a jackpot as compared to the normal mode. In the definite change mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode, and when the entry support lottery is won, the second The start winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is four seconds (opening for four seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds). That is, in the definite change mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is extended and Will increase. As a result, the time zone in which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is extended, so the gaming ball frequently enters the second start winning device 33b (high entering state). The lottery will be made continuously and the ball will be in good condition. In the high ball entering state, the probability that the “o” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery) may be made higher than that in the normal mode.

  In the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability is 1/300 and the small hitting probability is 1/600. Also, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times if the entry support lottery is won. And each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, the time reduction mode is the same low probability as the normal mode when the jackpot probability is the same, but when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen, it is the same as the probability variation mode. In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state of “8 RN” or “2 RN”, the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R in total show the variable number of times of the specified times (90 uniformly after “8 RN” Thus, “2 RN” sets the time reduction mode over 30 cases (“2 RN 30”), 60 cases (“2 RN 60”), and 90 cases (“2 RN 90”). In addition, the time reduction mode ends at the point when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the fluctuation display of the specified number of times even if the jackpot state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In the latent mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. Further, in the latent determination mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when winning in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, the latent probability mode is the same high probability as the probability variation mode when the jackpot probability is the same, but when looking at only the operation of the second start winning device 33b, it is the same as the normal mode. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of “2RS” ends, the latent mode is entered, and continues until at least the jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning by the lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, there is no allocation to win the "2 RN", so the latent mode ends silently The situation like that is avoided (it will be continued until winning a jackpot with balls).

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 19 and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19). Further, in the ROM 502, a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a), which is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, second type determination A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of the type of jackpot state to be granted is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), the jackpot state of the determined type is It will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the reach state occurs similarly to the “front and back out of reach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by only one before and after the reach symbol. After the final final stop design stops other than the front and rear reach design, it is decided to draw out "reach out except back and forth deviation" and "complete out" that reach condition does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table storing the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. In the reach determination table, the value of "0 to 238" is stored, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the other than back and forth, C3 = 22 to 238 is completely It is configured to respond to the disconnection.

  The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. .

  Also, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially added one by one within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59), it is the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to return 1 to 0, which is the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 37). It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decoration symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after reach occurrence. A more detailed pattern variation mode is determined, such as the elapsed time until the stop (in this example, the middle pattern). Therefore, various combinations of fluctuation patterns can be easily realized by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42.

  Note that the size and range of each counter are merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 be different prime numbers and be values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Also, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, 99, then returns to the lower limit value 0). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the gaming ball passes either the left or right through gate 34. Low entry The number of random numbers to be won in the ball state is 1. The range is 1. On the other hand, the number of random numbers to be won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("O" in this example) stops Shown, it is opened in a pattern in which the second start winning device 33b is corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into main processing activated upon turning on the power, timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in this embodiment, in 2 msec cycle), and stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The NMI interrupt process is activated by the input of the above, and for convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, while reading the states of various switches (except the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, when there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (game balls are dispensed) ). Further, upon the output of the prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is performed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). , 238, and 99), respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, start-up winning processing accompanying the winning of the start-up winning unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, through-gate passing processing accompanying passing of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily ended.

  Here, the start winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the RAM 503, a first hold counter Na that counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by winning on the first start winning apparatus 33a, and pending of variable displays triggered by winning on the second start winning apparatus 33b. A second hold counter Nb is provided to count the number.

  Also, in the execution area and the respective reserve areas of the special variation reserve area, a pass / fail random number storage area for storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the pass / fail random number storage area stores the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Further, each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and stores the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  Furthermore, the execution area of the special fluctuation reserve area is a fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) based on entering the ball into the first start winning device 33a, or based on entering the ball into the second start winning device 33b. A fluctuation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether it is fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) is stored. Hereinafter, "the fact that information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and that "the second variation display is in the variation storage area" The fact that the information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second change flag is set on”.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the second start winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the following step S504, the values of the random number counter C1 updated in the random number update processing of the step S303, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 (the random number counter buffer Each stored value) is stored in the first area (a random number storage area, a win type random number storage area, and a reach random number storage area) of free storage areas of the special variation storage area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a process of judging whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reserving area is a value corresponding to a large hit or a small hit is performed. The details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation hold area. Perform type determination processing to determine the type of The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the following step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, the value is out based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the success or failure determination process of step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area matches one of “7” and “307”, which is the value stored in the first validity determination table. Determine if By the way, "7" and "307" are values that become jackpots in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  Although the process of step S5101 is simplified and described in FIG. 14 for the sake of convenience, it is actually determined whether the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is "7" and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the yes / no random number counter C1 is "307", and if affirmed determination is made in either of these determinations, then affirmed determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made Also in the case where the negative determination is made, the negative determination is made in the step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first success or failure flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, in addition to the success or failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, information on whether or not a big hit condition occurs in the success or failure random number storage area is not provided separately. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the pass / fail random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in the step S5102, for example, "1010101010101010" is set in the pass / fail random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting of the pass / fail random number storage area will be described as turning on the first pass / fail flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value stored in the second pass / fail determination table. It is determined whether or not it is "316". By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" is a value that is a jackpot only in the probability variation mode. Incidentally, also in the case of the determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the big hit actually coincide with each other as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success or failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. When the second pass / fail flag is turned on, this means that, for example, “11001011011001100” is set for the pass / fail random number storage area.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, even if the high probability state is "out", in step S5105, the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the first It is determined whether or not it matches the value "404" stored in the small hit determination table. By the way, "404" is a value which becomes a small hit even in the low probability state or the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the information as to whether or not the small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the pass / fail random number storage area.

  When negative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area in step S5107 is the value stored in the second small hitting determination table "405 to 413" It is determined whether or not By the way, “405 to 413” is a value that is a jackpot only in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process ends.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, since information relating to the pass / fail is stored using 2 bytes, for example, when noise occurs, the pass / fail flag (stored contents of the pass / fail random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a jackpot state when the player is not winning, or the occurrence of a jackpot state when the player is elected. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the pass / fail random number storage area in the pass / fail judgment processing is a pattern not used when storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in the pass / fail random number storage area. is there.

  In addition to the success or failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, a success or failure flag is separately provided, and the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 is kept stored at this time. In the variation display setting process performed at the start, the corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, and the pass / fail may be determined. Further, a small random number counter may be provided separately from the success or failure random number counter C1 used for the jackpot determination.

  Next, the second type determination process of step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second yes / no flag is set to ON in the yes / no determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility that a big hit will occur), in step S5402, the second type determination table is referred to, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16 RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, the 16 RS flag or the like is not separately provided, but "16 RS" or the like in the winning type random number storage area. Is configured to store (overwrite) information. As described above, the winning classification random number storage area uses one byte, and in the step S5403, for example, "10101010" is set in the winning classification random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, that a pattern indicating a big hit type such as “16 RS” is set in the win type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag (16 RS flag or the like) indicating a big hit type. explain. The pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the win type random number storage area in the type determination process is not used when storing the value of the type determination counter C2 in the win type random number storage area It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5402, the second type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5404 and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to “8 RS”. It is determined whether or not any of "7 to 13" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set for the winning type random number storage area) in step S5405, and then the process ends.

  If NO in step S5404, the second type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5406, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2 RN 30". It is determined whether or not one of "14 to 17" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN 30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and then this process ends.

  If NO in step S5406, the second type determination table is referred to in step S5408, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2 RN 60". It is determined whether or not it matches "18". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the 2RN 60 flag is turned on in step S5409, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step S5408 is negative, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reserving area is “19” corresponding to “2 RN 90”. After turning on the flag, this processing ends. In the type determination process, it is sufficient that the type of jackpot can be determined. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16 RS” having a large number of random numbers corresponding to winning matches the acquired random value, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2 RN 90” matches the acquired random number value.

  Next, the reach determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first success or failure flag is set in the success or failure determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state (the big hit state always occurs), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the big hit state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility that it will be out), the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5302 It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reserving area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "reach before and after". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of the front / rear deviation reach is turned on, and then the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, the front and back flags are not separately provided, and information indicating that the reach random number storage area is "back and forth out of reach". Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in the step S5303, for example, "10101010" is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5304, and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area corresponds to "reach other than out of order". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of the values "2 to 21". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on in step S5305, and the process ends. Note that turning on the flag other than the front and back here means that, for example, “11001100” is set for the reach random number storage area.

  Further, in the case where the negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, in the case of “complete removal” in which the variable display ends without passing through the reach state, the present processing ends. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when storing the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 in the reach random number storage area is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a setting process of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that in the advance command, the fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of fluctuation display) which is stored pending is triggered by which of the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b enters. Together with information indicating whether or not to be included, and information indicating the result of the success / failure determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). .

  After the process of step S508, or when the negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start winning device 33 by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminates by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S510, the value of the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the winning of the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment) It is determined whether it is less than "4". If a negative determination is made in step S510, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the following step S512, each value of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is displayed as a vacant holding area of the special variation hold area (a probability random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) Store in). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a process of judging whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reserving area is a value corresponding to the big hit is performed. The details of the success or failure determination process have already been described above.

  In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation hold area. A first type determination process is performed to determine the type. In the present embodiment, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b. The distribution of jackpot types to be granted is different.

  Here, the first type determination process of step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second yes / no flag is set to ON in the yes / no determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a big hit will occur), in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16 RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the first type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "8 RN". It is determined whether or not one of "12 to 17" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

  If NO in step S5204, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5206, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2RS". It is determined whether or not one of "18, 19" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and the present process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the win / fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit. Based on the value of the selection counter C3, reach determination processing is performed to determine the type of reach. The details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

  After step S515, in step S516, the process of setting the preceding command is performed, and the process ends. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the random number counter C1 etc. is directly stored in the special change reserve area, and then the judgment processing is performed. Although the type determination processing and the reach determination processing are executed, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, there is provided a temporary storage area (work area) for temporarily storing the counter values when the value etc. of the random number counter C1 is acquired, and regarding the information stored in the temporary memory area After the determination process and the reach determination process are performed, a configuration may be employed in which the corresponding special variation reserve area is stored in the reserve area.

  Next, the through gate passing process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, it is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225 whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through gate 34, the number of pending variable display performed in normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present processing ends. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, passage of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the process proceeds to step S603 on condition that the value of the normal hold counter Nc <4 and the normal hold counter Increment Nc by one.

  Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to the pass / fail is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of the step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal variation reserving area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503 a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and performs the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the occurrence of power-off is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such an NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control under execution. Then, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon power-on reset.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power on is performed. Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance and waiting for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, the RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply 313 is pressed (ON), and if pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (delete) the backup data. Do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case. If occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 etc.). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, at the time of opening of the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM (step S113 etc.). In addition, when the occurrence information of the power failure is not set, or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.), the process similarly shifts to the initialization process (step S113 etc.) of the RAM 503. That is, in step S113, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S114, an initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition that power generation interruption information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal are satisfied. In addition, the processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, the power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In step S109, a command to return the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the start winning unit 33, etc. updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is Execute external output processing to transmit to each control device.

  For example, at the time of variation display of a decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42, a variation pattern command, a symbol command and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 having input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands. Is instructed to the display control device 45 so as to display (variation display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative symbol, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. The variation pattern command and the like are originally binary numbers of 2 bytes (the same output method as the hold information command), but are indicated by a hexadecimal number of 4 bits for convenience. In the present embodiment, for example, one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is a variation pattern command in the normal mode and the latency mode, for example. It is set. Further, in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, and “FD16” are set. On the other hand, in the sub-control device 262, the relationship between the variation pattern command and the variation type of the decorative symbol is stored as a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the change pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and the voice.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special display is displayed except for the variation of the decorative symbol. Then, “FF11” or “FD11” is set in the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach according to the mode. In the definite change mode and the time shortening mode, the variable display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode and the latency mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent mode, and “10 seconds” in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode.

  In Super Reach, characters etc. are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (after reaching the reach condition), and this is a reach pattern that brings a sense of expectation to the player. is there. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as the super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. And if it is a super reach SR1, "FF12" or "FD12" is set as the variation pattern command, if it is a super reach SR2, "FF13" or "FD13" is set, if it is a super reach SR3, "FF14" or "FD14" Is set.

  Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after reaching the reaching state), a character or the like having a pattern different from the super reach is displayed in addition to the decorative symbol. It is a reach pattern that causes the player to have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach. And if it is premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" will be set to a change pattern command. In the case of the premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

  In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set as the variation pattern command according to the mode to the variation pattern command corresponding to "completely out" which is not in any reach state. In the present embodiment, the variable display time which is completely out is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent mode, and to "6 seconds" in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode.

  Further, the sub control device 262 determines a stop symbol (a combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub controller 262 to determine the stop symbol, and a combination of probability variation big hit symbols, a combination of normal big hit symbols, a combination of front and back off symbols, a combination of front and back off symbols, a complete off design It designates five categories of combinations of. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “AA11”, “AA12”, “AA13”, “AA14”, “AA15”, and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these commands and the stop symbol is stored in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops and displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the division of the stop symbol and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. If you win a probability change jackpot ("16 RS" and "8 RS", hereinafter also referred to as "probability with a probability change jackpot") that you can expect an increase in game balls, or a regular big hit you expect an increase in game balls ("8 RN") Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol attached with the number pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of Zoro when the player wins the prize "also referred to as a" with a ball ". It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “with a certain probability variation big hit”, the probability variation big hit design or 2 which is a combination of 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 odd-numbered zoroku decorative symbols The variable display is stopped by any combination of the normal jackpot design, which is a combination of decorative patterns consisting of even numbers of 4, 6, and 8 even numbers, and in the case of "with a jackpot normal jackpot" Usually, the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols.

  Then, in the case of the popped ball existence probability variation big hit, "AA11" is set to the symbol command, and in the case of the popped ball presence normally hit, "AA12" is set to the symbol command. Then, when “AA11” is set to the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the 1 to 9 Zoromes as the stop symbol, and “AA12”. If "is set," one of the symbol combinations consisting of any of 2, 4, 6, and 8 is selected as the stop symbol.

  The combination of the front and back outset design corresponds to the “front and back out of reach reach” where the final stop design is shifted by one before and after the reach design after reaching reach and corresponds to the combination of front and back outset design "AA13" is set to the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop modes corresponding to "2RS", "2RN", and "small hit" are also a combination of front and rear off symbols. The combination of the symbols other than the front and back is a symbol corresponding to the "reach other than back and forth deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops other than the front and back of the reach symbol after reach is generated. "AA14" is set to the command. The combination of completely out of the pattern corresponds to "completely out of place" where even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of out of pattern completely. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the front and back sides of the symbol, the combination of the front and back sides, and the combination of the front and back sides are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the display is “off”.

  Although details will be described later, when "AA13" to "AA15" are set in the symbol command, the sub control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Decide as. In the present embodiment, three commands “AA13” to “AA15” are prepared as symbol commands for detachment, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, only one type of symbol command for detachment is available. The sub controller 262 may be configured to determine the combination of the decorative symbols.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the upper limit (59 and 37 in this embodiment), as in the other counters. Do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the following step S203, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of a jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of the special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when the player wins the lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, the jackpot state or the small hitting state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. There is. Details of the first variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when the player wins in the lottery based on the entry to the second starting winning device 33b, the jackpot state or the small hitting state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. There is. Details of the second variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S208, a normal display control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of the normal display control process will be described later.

  In step S209, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the start winning unit 33 is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if occurrence information of power-off is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come in step S211, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is performed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It repeatedly executes (step S212, step S213).

  That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S213, the change type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of step S201-S210 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time, and the fluctuation similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), the power is turned off. It will be. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in step S216 in step S216. Remember to

  Thereafter, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to another control device (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S218, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is inhibited in step S219, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed.

  Note that the process of step S210 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed at steps S201 to S209 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is small compared to the case where each processing is halfway And can be easily stored. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before storing data (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off, and the state before the power shutoff can be reliably stored. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, a hit situation storage area to be described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not it is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state now. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L, 43R until the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, After the final round, the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the special display device There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L, 43R, to when the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened; After the final round, the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the special display device There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started.

  In the win situation storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is stored in the opening period and the interval period. , "2" is stored in the round period, and "3" is stored in the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether the jackpot state or the small hitting state is in progress. It should be noted that the fact that numerical values such as "0" to "3" are stored in the hit situation storage area is for convenience, and in fact the hit situation storage area uses 2 bytes.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if a large hit state or a small hit state is in progress, the present processing is ended as it is, while if a positive determination is made in step S801, details will be described later in step S802. During the special figure display flag to be set is checked, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42). Specifically, it is considered that the variable display is in progress if the special view display flag is in the on state, and it is considered that the stop display in the variable display stop state is considered when the special view display flag is in the off state. . In addition, although the details will be described later, the flag during special image display is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is started, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R It is turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  Then, if the negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is not in the big hit state or the small hit state nor in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to step S803 and is triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds of the variable display (second variable display) is greater than zero.

  If a positive determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variation display is stored pending, 1 is subtracted from the second storage counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second change display is reserved and stored by the determination process of step S803, the second change display is performed without executing the first change display. That is, even if the first changeable display is reserved and stored earlier than the second changeable display, the second changeable display is prioritized and digested (the first changeable display is delayed). ing.

  In the subsequent step S805, a process of shifting data stored in the second special variation reserved area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas for suspension in the second special variation suspension area toward the execution area, and the first area for suspension → the execution area, the second for suspension Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, the variation identification lamp 40 is caused to emit light in red. Thereafter, in step S 807, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then the process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when no second variable display is stored on hold, in step S808, a variable display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a ( It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds of the first variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S809. In the subsequent step S810, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the first special variation reserved area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the first special variation reserved area to the execution area side, and the first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S810, in step S811, the variation identification lamp 40 is caused to emit blue light. Thereafter, the variable display setting process is performed in step S 807, and the process ends. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation reserve area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation reserve area and the second special fluctuation reserve area is subjected to the fluctuation display based on the data Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, the details of the variable display setting process of step S 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later, is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (probability change mode or latency mode). Discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored in the mode storage area. In the present embodiment, one of the values “11”, “12”, “21”, and “22” is stored in the mode storage area, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, "21" corresponds to the probability variation mode, and "22" corresponds to the latent mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state by determining whether "21" or "22" is stored in the mode storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if it is in a high probability state (probability change mode, latency mode), in step S902, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the first and second pass / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a high probability state in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If the negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode), in step S903, the first random flag is turned on by referring to the random number storage area Determine if it is not. If a positive determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, the jackpot determination flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been determined is set on. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the big hit state in the pass / fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the big hit determination flag ON.

  In the following step S 905, whether or not the second change flag is set ON, taking into account the change storage area of the execution area of the special change reserve area, that is, the change display performed this time is to the second start winning device 33 b. It is determined whether or not it is a second variable display for teaching the result of a win / fall lottery triggered by entering the ball. When an affirmative determination is made in step S905, in step S906, the 16RS flag (see the type determination processing in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) is set to ON, taking into consideration the win type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area. It is judged whether it is done or not.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, in the case of "16 RS", 16 RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing variable display for teaching generation of “16RS”, and special processing is performed based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the buffer for counter of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are prescribed in advance by a table or the like. After step S 907, the process proceeds to step S 931 described later.

  Further, if the negative determination is made in step S906, in step S908, it is determined whether the 8RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is "8 RS", an 8 RS pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether the 2RN 30 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, 2RN 30 pattern setting processing is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if the negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether the 2RN 60 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, a 2RN 60 pattern setting process is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN 90 flag is set to ON, the 2 RN 90 pattern setting process is performed in step S 914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S905, that is, if the variable display performed this time is the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery that is triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether the 16RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  Further, if the negative determination is made in step S915, in step S917, it is determined whether the 8RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if it is "8 RS", an 8 RS pattern setting process is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether the 8 RN flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, an 8 RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if the negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set to ON, the 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is referred to It is determined whether the second small hit flag is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that the small winning is won in the high probability state, it is indicated that the small hitting state has been determined in step S923. Set the hit confirmation flag on. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the small hitting state in the pass / fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the small hitting determination flag on. Thereafter, in step S924, the small hitting pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. If a positive determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that the small winning is won in the low probability state, the small hitting determination flag is set to ON in step S923, and in step S924 After performing the small hitting pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S 931.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if neither big hit nor small hit, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into account and the front and back flags It is determined whether or not 17) the reach determination processing is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, in the case of "reach before and after out of reach", after performing the front and rear reach pattern setting processing in step S927, the process proceeds to step S931.

  If the negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is referred to, and it is determined whether the flag other than the front or back is on. If the affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is the "reach other than back and forth deviation", reach pattern setting processing other than back and forth is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is "complete removal", out-of-variation pattern setting processing is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In step S 931, a special figure in-display flag indicating whether variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43 L and 43 R is set to on. This indicates that the conditions for performing the switching display (variation display) on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In the subsequent step S932, setting processing of a special view display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L, 43R is performed. The special view display timer is referred to when it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variation display) is output to special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output process of the next normal process based on the setting of such a special view display timer. Switching display (variation display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that receives the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S932, the variable display setting process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the random number counter C1 of the steps S504 and S512 and storing the value in the special change suspension area, the process of judging the steps S505 and 513, and the variable display setting In the process, the process of step S901 to S903, S922, and S925, which determines the success or failure based on the success or failure flag and the small hit flag, and the situation at that time, constitutes a success or failure lottery.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the determination in step S802 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S812, and the special view display timer subtraction process is performed. Every time this process is performed, the value of the special view display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set to the special view display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and the value of the special view display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special view display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and the present process ends. Note that, based on the setting content of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal indicating that switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R. As a result, switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the flag for displaying the special view is turned off in step S814, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting content of the stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R. That is, the stop display is performed in the stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, out-of-order, and the like. Further, a control signal to the effect that stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed is also output to the sub control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably achieved. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub control device 262 by the symbol command and the change pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again There is no need to add Moreover, although it becomes repetition, it is a display which mainly uses the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R, and the display of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42 becomes an auxiliary thing (for effect) to the last There is.

  Subsequently, in step S816, discrimination information setting processing for measuring the initial setting of the hit state and the period of the time shortening mode is performed, and then the present processing ends. Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, the win type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the 16RS flag is set to ON.

  If the determination in step S1002 is affirmative, in step S1003, the number-of-rounds counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (number of opening of the variable winning device 32) is set to "16". On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, "8" is set in the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1007, for example, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds is used for the special variable timer used for the control in the hit state (the opening and closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set Subsequently, in step S1008, the winning counter for counting the number of gaming balls entered into the first and second variable winning prize devices 32a and 32b is eight, which is the maximum number of balls entering per round. Set "8" shown. The value of the winning counter is the first and second count switches 223a whether or not the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have entered the ball in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. And 223b, and if it is determined that the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have entered the ball, one is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub controller 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information of the hit type and the like, and the sub controller 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1009, the present process ends.

  In addition, in the jackpot state effects such as promotion of the jackpot type of appearance (for example, when even Zoro eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, winning in "8RS" or "16RS" in the jackpot state immediately after In addition, it is possible to teach that has been done, or when an odd number of eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, to teach that "16 RS" has been won during the big hit state immediately after). .

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is referred to, and it is determined whether the small hitting determination flag is set to on.

  If the determination in step S1010 is affirmative (small hit) or if the determination in step S1004 is affirmative ("2 RS" or "2 RN"), the round number counter is "2" in step S1011. Set After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1013, a value "500" corresponding to, for example, an opening period of 2 seconds is set to the special variable timer, and in step S1014, "8" is set to the winning counter. Set the command. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If neither the jackpot nor the jackpot is determined and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode is set. It is determined whether or not it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S1016 is affirmative, in step S1017, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. Although this will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of "8 RN", "2 RN 30", "2 RN 60", "2 RN 90", the fluctuation display corresponding to the time shortening mode period for the fluctuation number counter The number of times is set, and 1 is subtracted in step S1010 each time the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once.

  In the following step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the time reduction mode period is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S1018 is affirmative, in step S1019, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate that the mode is the normal mode. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1019, in the step S1020, the time short end command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the process of performing the initial setting of the small hitting state and the process of performing the initial setting of the large hitting states of 2RS and 2RN are shared, but may be performed separately.

  Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the jackpot state and the small hitting state are other than the big hit state by determining whether the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, the present processing ends. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state or the small-jack state, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area in the above-described discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the large hit state or the small hit state is in progress (if any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit situation storage area), step S1202 Then, it is determined whether or not the first change flag is turned on in the execution area of the special change reserve area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and the value of the special variable timer is decremented by one. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, “2000” or “500” is set to the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In the following step S1204, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1204, it is determined in step S 1205 whether “1” is set in the hit situation storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1206. In the following step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot. Here, one of “16 RS”, “8 RS”, and “8 RN” which is a jackpot having a jackpot that can be awarded when winning in a lottery for winning or not being performed triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a. It is determined whether there is any (other than "2 RS").

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S1207, the value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer in step S1209. Set

  After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process is performed to open the first variable winning device 32a, and in step S1211, a round for conveying information to the effect that the round is to be started to the sub control device 262 Set the command. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set for the hit situation storage area when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are ended and the ending period is started. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot or small hit state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1213.

  In the following step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1217, a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1218, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

  After step S 1217 or step S 1218, “8” is set to the winning counter in step S 1219. Furthermore, in step S1220, processing for closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect of starting an interval to the sub control device 262 is set. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) for maintaining the open or closed state of the first variable winning device 32a remains, the process proceeds to step S1222. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is "0". In the winning counter, "8" which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of winnings per round is set at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state and the start of the interval. Then, each time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a, one is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if the end trigger of the round has come without waiting for the round setting period to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round is immediately ended at that time even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  In addition, if the positive determination is made in step S1214, that is, if all the rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are digested, the process proceeds to step S1223, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, in step S1225, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, in step S1226, a value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set to the special variable timer.

  After step S 1225 or step S 1226, “7” is set to the winning counter in step S 1227. When the process of setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the positive determination in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is “0”. Then, if the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination is made suddenly in step S1222, and the ending period is completed. Can not. Therefore, the ending period is completed by inserting a temporary numerical value ("7" in this example) other than "0" into the winning counter in step S1227. Of course, it may be configured to complete the ending period in another way.

  After step S1227, in step S1228, processing is made to close the first variable winning device 32a, and in the subsequent step S1229, an ending command is sent to the sub control device 262 to convey information to start ending. . Thereafter, the process ends.

  Further, when the determination in step S1212 is affirmative, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1230 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the fluctuation number counter are performed.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the small hitting determination flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is referred to, and it is determined whether the 8 RN flag is set on.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1403, a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state.

  In the following step S1404, "90" is set to the fluctuation number counter. Note that with the fluctuation count counter, when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started, the fluctuation display for the specified number of times set as the time reduction mode period is completed. To understand what happened. After step S 1404, in step S 1415, a time short start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode is set. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1405, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area is referred to, and it is determined whether the 2RN 90 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1403 as in the case where the 8 RN flag is set to on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether the 2RN 60 flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, "60" is set in the variation count counter in step S1408, and a time saving start command is set in step S1415. Is set, and then this process ends.

  Furthermore, when the negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether the 2RN 30 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, "30" is set in the variation count counter in step S1411, and a time saving start command is set in step S1415. Is set, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether the 2RS flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. Thereby, the latent mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latency start command for informing the sub control device 262 of the start of latency mode is set. Thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the positive variation mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. After step S1414, in step S1417, a positive change start command for notifying the start of the positive change mode to the sub controller 262 is set. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 22, after step S 1230, “0” is set in step S 1231 to indicate that the jackpot state and the small hit state are not for the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1232, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to convey information indicating that the big hit state or the small hit state is ended, and then the present process is ended. The hit end command includes the number information and the like of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

  The second variable winning device control process in step S207 of the normal processing (see FIG. 10) is basically the target of the opening / closing control for the first variable winning device control process is the second variable winning device 32b, It is executed when the second change flag is set to ON, and the only difference is in determining whether it is 16 RS or 8 RS when determining whether or not the ball is a jackpot with a big hit, so the description thereof is omitted. Do.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the flag in the common view display, which indicates whether the variable display is being performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is on. In addition, when the flag in the common drawing display is on, it is considered that the variable display is in progress in the normal symbol display device 41.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, when the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variable display of normal symbols is held, the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

  In the following step S2104, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the normal variation suspension area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas reserved in the normal change suspension area to the execution area side, and the first area reserved → the execution area, the second area reserved → The data in each area is shifted in such a way as the first holding area, the third holding area, the second holding area, the fourth holding area, and the third holding area.

  After that, in step S2105, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is set, and the common drawing fluctuation setting processing for starting is executed.

  Here, the common drawing fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S 2301, a common-diagram displaying flag indicating that variation display of an ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is being set is turned on. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether "0" is stored, that is, whether it is a state other than the jackpot state or the small hit state now. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, in step S2303, whether the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area That is, it is determined whether or not it is in the high ball-in state (time shortening mode or definite variation mode).

  If the affirmative determination is made in step S 2303, the variation display time of the normal symbol is displayed for the common view display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variation display performed in the normal symbol display device 41 in step S 2304 Set "100" to make it 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal variation reserving area is "0". In the high entry status, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of "0 to 99" is "1 to 99".

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the player wins the entry support lottery whether or not the second start-up winning device 33b is in the open state, then in step S2306 that the entry support lottery is won. Set the ball entry support flag shown on. After step S2306 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the present process ends.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, if it is in the big hit state, the small hit state, or the low ball entry state, in step S2307, a normal symbol for the common view display timer Set "2000" to change the display time to 8 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reserving area is "1". In the low pitch state, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of "0 to 99" is "1".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if a winning support lottery is won, then in step S2309, a entering support flag indicating that the winning support lottery is won is set on. After step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, the present process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 24, after step S2105, the present process ends. It should be noted that, when the control signal indicating that the variable display is to be started is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the setting in the common drawing variation setting processing, the normal symbol display device At 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "o" or "x" as an ordinary symbol, and if "o" is displayed, "x" or "x" If it is, the display is switched (varied) to “o”.

  If YES at step S2101, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying variable, the process proceeds to step S2106, and processing for subtracting a common view display timer is performed. Every time this process is performed once, the count value of the common view display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the common view display timer is “0”, that is, whether the fluctuation time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the common drawing display flag is turned off in step S2108, and the common drawing stop display setting for performing the stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the common view stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. That is, in the case of winning (when the ball support flag is set to ON), the symbol "○" (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lighted for only a few seconds) and when it is out, "x" Stop display the symbol.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the common drawing determination information setting process is performed, and the process ends. Here, the common drawing determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the ball entry support flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second startup winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

  In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S 2403, the open time of the second start winning device 33 b is 4 for the ordinary variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33 b in step S 2404. Set "1000" to be seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times, with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period. Further, in step S2410, after the setting for opening the second start winning device 33b is performed, the present process is ended.

  Also, in the case of a negative determination in step S 2403, that is, in the case of a low ball entry state, in step S 2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is 0.4 seconds for the ordinary variable timer. Set "100". In the subsequent step S2407, "1" is set in the opening number counter so as to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After the step S2407, the ball support flag is turned off in the step S2408, the flag is turned on in the support period in the step S2409, and the second start winning device 33b is set to be open in the step S2410, This process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and when it is "x", the display is switched to "o". Thereby, the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control processing, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the start winning prize apparatus control process of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202. In the following step S2203, it is determined whether the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the second start-up winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether the value of the ordinary variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b defined in advance has not yet elapsed, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205, and the normal variable flag is turned off. In the following step S2206, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in step S2207, setting is made to close the second starting winning device 33b.

  Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether the value of the release number counter is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag is turned off during the support period in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability change mode or the time shortening mode, and based on that, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times If there is the remaining number of times, a value (for example, "100") corresponding to the interval time is set to the normally variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, the process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, in the interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not elapsed yet, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the ordinary variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value ("1000" in this example) corresponding to the open time is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, after the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is made, the present process is ended.

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily put on standby, and a reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from main controller 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step S3002 to store that the command has been transmitted from main controller 261. The command reception flag is turned on to complete the present reception interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer for storing the next received command in the next storage area Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed in the interrupt process which is executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, whether or not the command is received is confirmed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and transition to command determination processing may be made if a command is not received. In such a case, by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon reset upon power-on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process is performed in response to power on. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the occurrence information of the power-off is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the power-off It is determined whether or not the backup is effective. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 513. In addition, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  When the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106 or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process for initializing the RAM 513 is performed after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, an initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit an interrupt.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing upon power recovery (power failure recovery) Process). That is, the stack pointer before power-off is restored in step S3109, the power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag for permitting payout of the prize ball is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, CPU peripheral devices are initialized. In step S3113, the use register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power is shut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process at the time of the power-off. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is inhibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 513.

  Since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the completion of the process performed at the time of power-on, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is compared with the case where each process is in progress. Less and easier to remember. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is periodically (in this embodiment, 2 msec cycle) activated.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above is received.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control device 261, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of step S3302 to step S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether it is a payout return command or not, and in step S3306, it is a prize ball command Whether or not it is determined.

  If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether the payout permission flag has already been turned on, and if the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the winning balls is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized coincide with each other. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the timing of initialization being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command can not be performed, etc. Can prevent the occurrence of negative effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the winning balls can be set reliably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3307 that the payout permission flag has been turned on, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized in the state where the payout permission flag is set. The payout initialization command is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout permission flag is not turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognizes it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the clearing of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and the setting of the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) are executed while the payout permission flag is on, the payout ball will not be paid out if it remains, etc. Although a bad effect is caused to give a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent giving a loss to the player.

  In addition, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutoff. In order to permit payout of the winning balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power failure, the payout of the winning balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. It will be updated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. In order to permit the payout of the winning balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And memorize. Since the payout of the winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls is performed based on the winning ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the winning ball command is a payout instructing command instructing the payout of the winning balls. . Further, when the award ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the award balls can be paid out earlier than the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. It will be updated.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (NO at step S3304) nor a payout return command (NO at step S3305), and if it is not a winning ball command (NO at step S3306), The command determination processing is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing ends. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being performed before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step S3204 and the state recovery operation start is determined. Execute recovery operation. By this processing, for example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray full is reached, the lower tray full condition setting is executed, and the lower tray full run out. , Set the lower plate full release state. Also, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball absent state (ball out state) or the tank sphere absent state (ball present state) is executed according to the change of the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, the tank sphere absence state is made special, the setting of the tank sphere absence state is executed, and the tank ball absence state is absent, the tank sphere no release state Execute the setting.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, it is determined whether there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of winning balls and rental balls is executed. In more detail, in step S3208, the payout number setting process is performed, in step S3209, the motor control state acquisition process is performed, and in step S3210, the motor driving process is performed.

  In step S3211, the state recovery switch 321 is checked, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal processing on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

  Next, normal processing of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, it is stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  In the subsequent step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed to store information on the prior command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553. Note that, as described above, the advance command indicates information indicating which of the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b is the variable display triggered by entering the ball, and indicates whether it is the fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot. It includes information, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

  The holding information storage area is, similarly to the special variation holding area of the main control device 261, a first holding information storage area and a second holding information storage area provided with four holding areas (the first holding to the fourth holding area), respectively. , And one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, according to the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special change hold area), information of whether or not a big hit, big hit type, small hit or not The information as to whether or not the information and the information (the fluctuation information) on the fluctuation display such as the reach type are stored in time series. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the prior command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting the configuration, variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a, and a second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Can store four pieces of fluctuation information regarding. As a result, not only the execution areas of the first and second special variation reserve areas of the main controller 261 but also the variation information stored in the reserve area can be grasped by the sub controller 262 .

  The on-hold information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether the advance command corresponds to entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) in step S4102 Determine if it is not. If the negative determination is made here, that is, if the advance command corresponds to the entry of the first start winning device 33a (the variation information stored in the first special variation suspension area), in step S4103 The first change suspension counter Nd for counting the number of suspension of the fluctuation information stored in the first suspension information storage area is incremented by one.

  In the following step S4104, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the preceding command, the information on jackpot type, the information on whether or not the small hit, the information on reach type, etc. are displayed in the vacant reserve area of the first reserve information storage area. I will memorize in the first area.

  In the subsequent step S4105, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the effect display related to each other is intentionally derived in a plurality of continuous variable displays (a so-called "continuous notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to give the continuous notice, and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information storage. In the area, the change information is stored in the reserve area newly stored in step S4104.

  The continuous announcement counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous advance notice counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer).

  The notice type counter is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 9 and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  Then, when fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area in the notice information storage processing, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, in each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area, a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is derived is provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table, which is referred to when deciding whether to give a continuous notice, and a notice table, which is considered when deciding the form of the continuous notice. A plurality of notice success judgment tables and notice tables are provided, and the notice success judgment table and notice table to be referred are selected according to the fluctuation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost one among the four first holding lamps 46a) is lit. It will be in the state. The first holding lamp 46 a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In the subsequent step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice, and then the process ends.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107, when the value of the first variation hold counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, With reference to the notice success / failure determination table respectively corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, and game mode, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, a notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. Refer to to decide whether to execute continuous notice. In addition, among the pending areas of the first pending information storage area, the continuous advance notice flag of all the pending areas in which the variation information is stored is turned on. However, the continuous advance flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, if the advance command corresponds to entering the second starting winning apparatus 33b (the variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area), The process advances to step S4108 to increment by one the second variation suspension counter Ne that counts the number of suspension of variation information that is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the small hit, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant holding area of the second holding information storage area. In the first area of In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold area where the fluctuation information is newly stored in step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second storage lamps 46b in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost one among the four second lamps 46b) is lit. I assume. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In the subsequent step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice, and the process ends. Incidentally, the continuous notice lottery process in step S4112 merely corresponds the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107 to entering the second start winning device 33b, and the description will be omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when the negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, upper, middle, and lower used for setting of each outlying symbol of a large hit decorative symbol counter CO, an upper symbol display region, a middle symbol display region, and a lower symbol display region. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that the register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO There are nine (0 to 8) counter values prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 8 and to return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 8).

  Then, if the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "AA11" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is to be stopped, based on a table (a table for correlating the counter value and the decoration symbol) not shown. For example, if the counter value is 0, the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner as to be “1” (Zoro eyes), and 1 “2” (Zoro eyes). The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub controller 262 receives the symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the large hit decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the large hit decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553. However, it is not stored in the buffer, but the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. You may

  In addition, if the symbol command is "AA12" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1 if it is "2" (the zoro eyes), if it is 2 to 4. Determine the combination of the jackpot symbols, such as “4” (Zoro eyes), 5 or 6 “6” (Zoro eyes), 7 or 8 “8” (Zoro eyes), etc. .

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stop symbols for the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is out of the process. Since one of nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol of the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol of the middle symbol display region is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol of the lower pattern display region is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted and the current value is determined . The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 back and forth, the reach pattern buffer other than the back and forth, and complete It is stored in any of the out-of-patterns.

  Here, the process of updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle and lower symbol counters CL, CM and CR are configured to be updated one by one in a single update process. Therefore, when the lower figure symbol counter CR is updated in the previous updating process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. Then, if it is the time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003, and the upper symbol counter CL is updated. If the middle symbol counter CM is updated (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the middle symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the figure counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the figure counter CR is updated. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, The calculation result is taken as the current value of the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the update process of CL, CM and CR, the upper, middle and lower symbol counters CL, CM and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap There is no. Thus, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is performed three times.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol of the upper symbol display area and the symbol of the lower pattern display region are the same) If it is determined that it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of big hit symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same) Determine if When an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is ended without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and back out symbols. If the symbol counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and back off symbols (front and back off reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, the combination of the symbol counter CL, CM, CR at that time The outreach reach symbol is stored in the buffer, and this processing is ended. If the symbol counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of other symbols (reach other than back and forth deviation) (S4008 is NO), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the symbol counter CL, CM, CR combination at that time Is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the back and forth deviation of the RAM 553 and the present process is ended.

  Also, if it is a combination other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the out symbol counter CL, CM, CR is out of combination and the symbol (completely out symbol) is combined, so in step S4011 A combination of out-of-time symbol counters CL, CM, CR is stored in the completely out-of-pattern buffer of the RAM 553 and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, in step S3906, a hold process is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether a change pattern command has been received (whether a change pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step S4201 is affirmative, in step S4202, it is determined whether the value of the second change suspension counter Ne is larger than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored pending, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second changeable display is digested prior to the first changeable display, and when the second changeable display is reserved and stored, the first changeable display is digested. There is nothing to do. That is, when the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is reserved and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display is not sent. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second change suspension counter Ne is larger than “0”, so that the change pattern command indicates the first change display and the second change display. It is determined which of the fluctuation information of Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information as to which fluctuation information corresponding to the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, and based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation pattern command is subjected to the first fluctuation display and It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display has.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the first hold information storage area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous announcement flag) stored in the first to fourth areas for suspension in the first suspension information storage area toward the execution area, and the first area for suspension The data in each area is shifted in the order of execution area, holding second area, holding first area, holding third area, holding second area, holding fourth area, and holding third area.

  In the following step S4205, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the lighting state (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first holding lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  Further, if the determination in step S4202 is affirmative, that is, if at least one piece of change information of the second change display is stored pending, in step S4206, the value of the second change suspension counter Ne is decremented by one.

  In the following step S4207, a process of shifting data stored in the second hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage area toward the execution area, and the first pending area → the execution area, the second pending Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area of the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area are indicated by variable display corresponding to the data. It will be shifted to a common execution area when being

  In the subsequent step S4208, one of the second storage lamps 46b in the lighting state (for example, the rightmost one of the second storage lamps 46b that are on) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a notice setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for continuous notice. In the notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (refer to the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107) of the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Because this process is not performed, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not, in the case of a jackpot what type is determined, if not a jackpot, a reach type is discriminated on the basis of the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at a predetermined timing for the corresponding variable display. After step S4209, the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display, the first variation is performed when a plurality of first variation displays are notified in advance. If the second start-up winning device 33b is entered during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may be interrupted between the plurality of first variable displays, and the continuous advance notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous advance notice can be derived also at the time of the normal change display when the continuous advance notice is not performed (the effect can be derived for the single change display) Is used. For this reason, even if continuous notice is interrupted, no sense of incongruity occurs.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, in step S3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol and the like to determine the display pattern and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45.

  The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 42. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, the symbol is displayed based on the cooperation of sub control device 262 and display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

  In addition, when the variable display is started, when the continuous advance notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is changed based on the change information of the change pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, determine the type of continuous notice to be derived in the variable display, determine the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice, or perform display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. To Furthermore, in the display setting process of the step S3907, a process (performing display process) of performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit is also performed, which will be described later.

  In the lamp setting process of step S3908, in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electric decoration is set.

  In the sound setting process of step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. When a command relating to voice is transmitted from the main control device 261, such as notification of error occurrence, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3909.

  In step S3910, control setting of customer waiting effect (for example, demo screen display set to be displayed when predetermined time elapses in a state where fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed; other settings, etc.) Perform the processing of

  At step 3911, an external output process of transmitting control signals to the respective devices based on the setting contents at steps S 3905 to 3910 is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 at the time of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  After the processes of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec are executed, or when the negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and generation information of power-off is stored in RAM 553 or not. Determine if Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, where it is determined whether the RAM 553 is destroyed. Here, if the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the occurrence information of the power-off is stored, the power-off process is executed in step S3914. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is inhibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased. After execution of the power-off process, the process is looped endlessly.

  Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit state or the small hit state from the main control device 261 is received. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, in step S4702, the round grasping counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds is “16” if it is “16 RS” based on the information included in the opening command. Set “8 RS”, “8” if “8 RN”, “2 RS”, “2 RN”, “2” if “small hit”.

  After that, in step S4703, if there is a big drop out ball, setting of opening effect for 8 seconds (image of decoration symbol display device 42, sound of speaker SP, setting of lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and the various presentation modes in the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is referred to by referring to the table. You will select and have it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, whether or not an interval command has been received is determined in step S4704. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, then in step S4705, if a jackpot with a large hit is made, effects are set for a maximum of 30 seconds in a round, and then this processing is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if there is a big drop out in step S4708, effects are set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if it is a big hit with a popped out in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot other than a jackpot with a jackpot or a small jack, the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period ( Instead of setting the effects by dividing them into each period such as one second), it is set to perform effects (announcements etc.) throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not the hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and the setting is made to be the mode of the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. Thereafter, the process ends.

  As described above, according to the first embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the start winning shutter 405 for opening and closing the start winning opening 402, and the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position. In some cases, the start winning opening 402 is closed, and the game ball can not enter the starting winning opening 402. Therefore, conventionally, the gaming ball whose entry to the start winning opening 402 is refused by the start winning shutter 405 is directly downstream of the second starting winning device 33b without entering the start winning opening 402. It will flow down. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33 b is provided with the introduction path 412 and the introduction path 412 to which the game ball whose entry to the start winning opening 402 is rejected by the start winning shutter 405 is guided. A re-entry path 414 for guiding the guided gaming ball to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is provided, and even if entry to the starting winning opening 402 is denied once, later, to the starting winning opening 402 again. It is configured to be able to try to hit the ball.

  Therefore, in the high entering state in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode, the starting winning opening 402 is entered among the game balls hit to aim at entering the starting winning opening 402 of the second starting winning device 33b. The number of gaming balls to be balled, and the number of gaming balls that are restricted by the start winning shutter 405 and excluded from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second starting winning device 33b without entering the start winning opening 402 In proportion, the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the starting winning opening 402 can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the high ball entry state, almost all of the right-handed game balls are started since the start-up winning shutter 405 is in the open position almost all the time (if continuing to hit the right). It is designed to enter the winning opening 402.

  In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the start winning opening 402 can be efficiently entered into the starting winning opening 402, and the ball launched for aiming at the start winning opening 402 enters the ball. It is possible to reduce the amount of balls that do not reach as much as possible, and to prevent the situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls to enter the start winning hole 402. As a result, the burden on the player is reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game (in this example, there is only one payout for entering the start winning opening 402). Regardless, in the high ball entry state, it is possible to play the game without substantially reducing the number of game balls on hand) and by efficiently entering the game balls into the start winning opening 402, it is possible to play the game. It is possible to make it progress with good vigor (it is possible to keep the change display without stopping and to increase the tempo of the change display).

  In general, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the open position, the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the second start winning device 33b, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the second It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the starting winning opening 402 by performing a technical operation to refrain from launching the gaming balls at such timing as reaching the starting winning device 33b. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such operations, and even if the number of game balls entered into the second start winning device 33b is the same per predetermined time, There is a concern that a difference may occur in the number of game balls emitted, and in the long run, a relatively large difference may occur in the total number of game balls obtained by the player. Furthermore, in the development of the pachinko machine 10, etc., the design is made based on the actual situation in the game hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of game balls fired and the total number of game balls paid out The payout rate) is designed to include the amount of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players who perform the above-mentioned technical operation is large, in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, the winning probability such as a winning lottery is lowered, various game balls are paid out The game ball tends to reach the winning opening and reduce the possibility of entering the ball, which may increase the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the start winning opening 402 even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the second start winning device 33 b when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position. Since there is a possibility of balls, the generation of wasted balls that do not enter the start winning hole 402 is suppressed even if the game balls are kept firing. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second start winning device 33b, on the upstream side of the start winning opening 402, a guide stand 407 for guiding the gaming ball to the start winning opening 402 from a substantially fixed direction is provided. A game nail or character provided on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33 b is configured to guide the right-handed game ball to the guide stand 407. As a result, before the gaming ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball will be adjusted, and the moving direction and movement of the gaming ball entering the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 Irregularities in speed can be reduced. Therefore, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry into the start winning opening 402 is rejected by the start winning shutter 405 is caused to turn into the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, By providing the game ball with an opportunity to reach the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at a later timing, it is possible to further ensure the effect of improving the probability of entering the starting winning opening 402.

  Furthermore, since the start winning shutter 405 is configured to slide in the front-rear direction, it can be configured to enter the start winning opening 402 by the action of the gaming ball falling, and smooth to the starting winning opening 402 It is possible to realize ball entry. In addition, the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412 on the top surface of the start winning shutter 405. That is, since the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412 by the start-up winning shutter 405 when the start-up winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the movable type for guiding the game ball to the introduction path 412 It is not necessary to separately provide a member of the above, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, suppression of cost increase and the like can be achieved.

  In addition, for example, when opening the start winning combination opening 402 by rotating the start winning combination shutter extending forward and backward, the gaming ball thought to have entered the start winning combination opening 402 is launched outside the start winning combination shutter. It is possible to avoid situations such as being thrown away by Furthermore, for example, in the configuration in which the start winning combination shutter extending forward and backward is rotated downward to open the start winning combination port 402, a large number of gaming balls fall on the start winning combination shutter at one time and the start winning combination shutter opens. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the start winning opening 402 without being opened.

  In addition, although the start winning shutter 405 that extends in the front-rear direction when in the closed position and receives the lower surface side of the gaming ball is likely to be relatively heavily loaded, as in the present embodiment, the start winning shutter 405 By setting the front end portion and the like of the lower surface to be supported by the opening peripheral edge of the start winning opening 402, it is possible to reduce the load on the root side of the start winning shutter 405, and the start winning shutter 405 has a root It is possible to prevent a situation in which the side is broken. In addition, the reinforcing rib 409 is provided on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405, the strength of the start winning shutter 405 is improved, and the start winning shutter 405 is prevented from being damaged when the game ball collides. can do.

  Also, in the big hit state and small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, it is in the low entering state, and it is difficult to win the entry support lottery, the variation time of the normal symbol is long, entering the ball Even if the support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is almost closed because most of the time for which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is short, etc. It comes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. On the other hand, for example, when the second variable winning device 32b is on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device of the game ball by the game ball passing through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 The approach to 32b is delayed. In particular, in the reentry route of the game ball from the upper position of the start winning opening 402 through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again, even though the upper position of the start winning opening 402 Even if the re-entry route is crossed, the game balls are in contact on the start winning shutter 405 which is a closed position which is the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, and the residence time becomes longer, etc. The second variable winning device 32b may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. In this respect, by disposing the second variable winning device 32b on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, it is possible to smoothly enter the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, the load on the start winning shutter 405 can be reduced by reducing the number of gaming balls entering the second start winning device 33 b (the start winning shutter 405 is prevented from entering the start winning opening 402). it can. In addition, it is possible to avoid crowding of the gaming balls in the second start-up winning device 33b during the jackpot state to prevent the flow from becoming bad, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize such bad appearance. .

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below. In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is characterized, and will be described with reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers.

  The second variable winning device 32b is provided on the front side of the mounting plate 431 attached to the front side of the game board 30, and on the front side of the mounting plate 431, and has a large winning opening 432 (see FIG. 42), a rectangular flat-shaped big winning shutter 434 as an opening and closing member for opening and closing the big winning opening 432, and a winning opening solenoid 435 (FIG. 42) for opening and closing the big winning shutter 434. See) and. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, the mounting plate 431 is formed with a communication hole 436 for allowing passage of gaming balls having entered the big winning opening 432, and is connected to the communication hole 436. There is provided a winning passage 437 for guiding the game board to the rear side (discharge passage portion 217) of the game board 30. The count switch 223 b is provided so as to detect the game ball passing through the winning aisle 437. Further, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening 432 corresponds to the specific winning opening.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 42, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b of this embodiment is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. When the special winning opening solenoid 435 is in the non-excitation state, the special winning shutter 434 protrudes toward the game area to close the special winning opening 432. On the other hand, when the special winning opening solenoid 435 is in the illustrated state, the special winning shutter 434 slides so as to be positioned behind the front surface of the mounting plate 431, and the special winning opening 432 is opened. ing.

  Also, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position where the second variable winning device 32b is closed, the big winning shutter 434 restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 432, but Since the big winning shutter 434 of the embodiment extends back and forth, the restricted game ball is placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, at least the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is slightly inclined downward to the right. Furthermore, the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 has no step at least in the left-right direction, and is a flat surface in this example. Therefore, winning of the big winning opening 432 is restricted by the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position, and the gaming ball placed on the top of the big winning shutter 434 is guided to the top of the big winning shutter 434 and moves leftward. It will be done.

  Also, when the big winning shutter 434 is brought to the open position with the gaming ball resting on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position, all gaming balls on the big winning shutter 434 at that time are below. It is designed to win a prize winning opening 432.

  The upper edge of the left wall of the ball support member 433 is at the same height as the left side of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 or at a lower position than the big winning shutter 434. The game ball that has reached the left side of the game is discharged to the left of the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, the upper edge portion (dropping prevention means) of the front wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is positioned above the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is a big winning shutter It is not located forward of 434.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the gaming ball is guided to the right end portion side of the second variable winning device 32b by the game nails and prizes located on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. It has become so. That is, the gaming ball having moved to a position immediately above the second variable winning device 32b falls to the right, which is the upstream side portion of the big winning shutter 434 that leans to the lower left when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. It is configured to Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32 b is configured to roll from the right to the left of the big winning shutter 434.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively gentle (for example, 1 degree to 9 degrees), and the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively slowly moved to the left. Become. Furthermore, the width of the entrance of the big winning opening 432 of this embodiment is configured as large as possible (for example, 100 mm to 135 mm), and the gaming ball mounted on the top of the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position has a relatively long time A state of being placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is set.

  Further, unlike the second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment has a shape called a general electronic tulip. That is, a pair of wing members 438 are provided adjacent to the left and right sides of the start winning opening where the game ball can enter. In the present embodiment, when the game nail is disposed immediately above the starting winning opening of the second start winning device 33b and the wing member 438 is in the vertically extending extended position, There is no room for the game ball to pass between the blade member 438 and the wing member 438) and the starting winning opening is closed, and it is impossible to enter the starting winning opening. On the other hand, the game ball can enter the starting winning opening by displacing the wing member 438 to the open position opening outward.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the second start winning device 33b is disposed upstream of the game area (lower right portion area) than the second start winning device 33b. When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, most of the game balls hit to the right enter the second start winning device 33b. In addition, when the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state, the game ball moving to the downstream side of the second start winning device 33b without entering the second start winning device 33b is the second variable winning device 32b. The arrangement (such as the arrangement of the game nails disposed in the game area and the relative positional relationship between the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b) is preferred. In the present embodiment, (the special winning opening of the second variable winning device 32b) constitutes a specific winning opening, and the special winning shutter 434 constitutes an opening / closing member and a time difference passing opportunity giving means.

  As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32 b is in the closed position, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32 b is the big winning shutter 434. As a result, the winning of the special winning opening 432 is restricted, and the upper surface of the special winning shutter 434 is rolled as it is. When the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the gaming ball rolling on the big winning shutter 434 enters the big winning opening 432. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, it is possible to wait for the timing when the big winning shutter 434 is next to the open position while being able to enter the big winning opening 432. In particular, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434, that is, the width in the lateral direction which is the moving direction of the gaming ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 is configured as long as possible, and the inclination is relatively gentle. The gaming ball guided to the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is configured to stay on the upper face of the big winning shutter 434 as long as possible if the big winning shutter 434 is not in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the case where the game ball hit to the right during the jackpot state in which the second variable prize device 32b is opened is discharged from the out port 36 without entering the big prize port 432, the big prize The game balls launched into the game area to enter the mouth 432 can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 432.

  Further, even if the opening time of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively short, the big winning opening 432 can be made to enter for the game balls placed on the big winning shutter 434. That is, when the big winning shutter 434 is closed, the gaming ball can be placed on the big winning shutter 434, and the short winning opening of the big winning shutter 434 can cause all of them to enter the big winning opening 432. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined plurality of game balls without increasing the total opening time of the big winning shutter 434. For example, the game balls are stored on the big winning shutter 434 during the interval of the jackpot state, and the big winning shutter 434 is opened at the same time as the start of the round to make the playing balls enter the big winning opening 432 at once. An end-of-round condition (e.g., 8 wins) may be achieved). For this reason, improvement of time efficiency etc. can be aimed at.

  In addition, the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position closing the big winning opening 432 of the second variable winning device 32b extends forward and backward, and when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the gaming ball is downward The large winning opening 432 is made to win by moving it. Therefore, for example, the action and reaction of the game ball until the game ball is made to win the big winning hole 432 is better than the case where the big winning shutter extends up and down and the game ball is moved backward to make the winning hole It gets faster. Therefore, by setting the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position to the open position, the large winning hole 432 can be relatively quickly made to win the gaming ball that has restricted the winning in the large winning opening 432 by the large winning shutter 434 Can.

  In addition, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b is inclined to the lower left by the game nails, characters and the like disposed on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, on the upstream right side of the big winning shutter 434 It is supposed to be guided to the site of As a result, the above-described effect of causing the gaming ball to stay on the big winning shutter 434 for as long as possible is more reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state has to support the lower surface side of the gaming ball, and the burden of receiving the falling gaming ball is large. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the second variable winning device 32b downstream of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b can enter the second starting winning device 33b. The number of game balls moving toward can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the big winning shutter 434 can be reduced.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 43, focusing on the second start-up winning device 33b which is a characteristic part. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers.

  The second variable winning device 32b of the third embodiment is basically the same as the second variable winning device 32b of the first embodiment, and includes a base plate 401 and a start winning opening 402 (not shown in FIG. 43), A guide stand 407 and a start winning shutter 405 are provided. However, the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 are omitted, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the gaming ball once dropped onto the start winning shutter 405 is discharged to the discharge opening 411 as it is. It is supposed to be.

  Now, in the present embodiment, the guide plate 407 is provided with a switching plate 451 that changes state to an open state that allows passage of the gaming ball to the start winning hole 402 side and a closed state that restricts passage. A rotating shaft 452 is provided on one long side of the switching plate 451, and the rotating shaft 452 is provided to extend in the front and back direction at a position near the leading edge of the guide stand 407. A motor 453 (or another driving means) is connected to the rear surface side of the base plate 401 of the rotating shaft 452.

  The switching plate 451 of the present embodiment is in the closed state during the variation display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 41 and is in the open state in the state of the stop display. That is, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position during the variable display of the normal symbol, even if the gaming ball moves to the upper position of the start winning mouth 402, the start winning hole 402 is won Because it is impossible, the game ball is blocked on the upstream side of the start winning opening 402. And, when it is elected in the ball entry support lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the switching board 451 is put in the open state, so that the game ball blocked by the switching board 451 is , And will enter the opening start winning opening 402. When the player does not win in the entry support lottery, of course, the start winning shutter 405 is not opened, and therefore, it is discharged from the discharge opening 411.

  Further, an accommodation recess 455 is formed adjacent to the rear of the guide stand 407 in the second start winning device 33b. That is, when the number of gaming balls blocked by the switching plate 451 in the closed state exceeds a predetermined amount, the gaming balls are guided to the housing recess 455. The bottom surface of the housing recess 455 is slightly inclined downward toward the guide stand 407. Further, in the present embodiment, the switching plate 451 constitutes a time difference passing opportunity giving means (stopper).

  As described above in detail, according to the third embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position, the gaming ball that has reached the guide stand 407 moves the guide stand 407 as it is. Even if it jumps out to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, it is not possible to win a start winning opening 402 by being blocked by the start winning shutter 405 in the closed position. In such a case, according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball is not positioned at the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at the normal timing, but the gaming ball is positioned at the upper position of the starting winning opening 402. By delaying the arrival timing, the gaming ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 as much as possible when the start winning shutter 405 is not in the closed position, that is, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the open state. It can be configured. In particular, in the present embodiment, at the timing of the stop display of the variation display of the normal symbol, the switching plate 451 holding the gaming ball by the guide stand 407 is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow down, so that the height is high. In the ball entering mode, at this timing, the start-up winning shutter 405 is in the substantially open position, and the gaming ball that has been blocked is almost entering the start-winning hole 402. Therefore, the operation and effect of making the starting winning opening 402 efficiently enter the game ball launched into the game area in order to cause the starting winning opening 402 to enter can be reliably achieved.

  Further, a modification of the third embodiment will be described here with reference to FIG. That is, the detour passage 456 is provided adjacent to the back side of the guide stand 407 in the second start-up winning device 33b in the present embodiment. The bypass passage 456 has an inlet 457 and an outlet 458 respectively linked to the guide platform 407, and the inlet 457 is linked to a portion on the upstream side of the guide platform 407 than the outlet 458.

  Furthermore, although the switching plate 459 is provided also in this embodiment, the rotation shaft 460 extends vertically in the vicinity of the boundary between the inlet 457 and the outlet 458 of the bypass passage 456 in this embodiment. It is provided in an open state where it guides the gaming ball moving the guide platform 407 to the downstream side of the guide platform 407 as it is, and a closed state where it guides the gaming ball moving the guide platform 407 to the entrance 457 of the bypass passage 456 It is configured to be changeable. When the switching plate 459 is in the open state, the gaming balls dropped to the upstream side of the guide stand 407 move straight down the guide stand 407 and move to the upper position of the start winning opening 402.

  On the other hand, when the switching plate 459 is in the closed state, the gaming ball dropped to the upstream side of the guide platform 407 passes from the bypass platform 456 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 from the guide platform 407. It will move. That is, the time from when the game ball falls to the guide stand 407 until it reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is delayed. Also in this example, the switching plate 459 is closed during the normal symbol variation display of the normal symbol display device 41, and is open in the stop display condition. In this embodiment, the switching plate 459 and the bypass passage 456 constitute a time difference passing opportunity giving means, and the switching plate 459 constitutes a course changing means.

  As described above, also in the present embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33 b is in the closed position, the timing is slightly shifted (slightly delayed) to start the game ball. By configuring to reach the upper position of 402, the possibility of winning the game ball in the start winning opening 402 can be enhanced.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55, focusing on the second start-up winning device 33b which is a characteristic part. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers.

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration other than the second start winning device 33b is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the arrangement of the second start winning device 33b is also the same as that of the first embodiment. The winning device 33b is disposed on the downstream side of the game area from the second variable winning device 32b.

  As shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc., the second start winning device 33b includes a base plate 471 attached to the game board 30, and a first start win as a first specified win and a second specified win. , A second shutter as a first opening and closing member for opening and closing the first starting winning opening 472, and a second shutter as a second opening and closing member for opening and closing the second startup winning opening 473 It has 475 and. Furthermore, the start winning switch 224b is provided corresponding to each of the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473, and in the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 are provided. No matter which prize is won, the same treatment is performed as if there was a prize in the second start-up winning device 33b (so that the second variable display is held).

  Further, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are configured to be slidable back and forth, and are in a closed position where they project into the game area and close the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 (FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) and an open position (see FIG. 49, FIG. 51 etc.) for leaving the game area and opening the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 There is. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are integrated and operated by one solenoid 476 (the closed position of FIG. 52; Can be displaced to the open position). Thereby, the opening and closing operation of the first shutter 474 and the opening and closing operation of the second shutter 475 are configured to be exactly the same, and one of the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 is opened. It is configured such that there is no situation where one is closed. Also in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are set to the open position when the player wins in the entry support lottery (opening and closing lottery) performed by the main controller 261 (opening and closing lottery means). It has become. Alternatively, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 may be individually provided, and each may be operated by a separately provided solenoid.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the first starting winning opening 472 is located to the right and above the second starting winning opening 473. Further, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33 b includes a communication passage 477 provided between the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473. The connecting passage 477 inclines downward to the left while meandering back and forth. The upper surfaces of the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are also inclined downward to the left. In this embodiment, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position when the gaming ball moves to the upper position of the first start winning opening 472, the winning of the first starting winning opening 472 of the gaming ball is the first While being regulated by the one shutter 474, the gaming ball is guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the draft communication passage 477.

  The game ball entering the communication passage 477 is guided to the upper position of the second start winning opening 473 while meandering along the communication passage 477. At this time, if the second shutter 475 is in the open position, the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 473. On the other hand, when the second shutter 475 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted by the second shutter 475 from winning in the second start winning opening 473, and is guided leftward by the upper surface of the second shutter 475, It will be discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the communication passage 477 constitute a ball entry opportunity giving means. Further, in the present embodiment, the communication passage 477 corresponds to the second specified entering route.

  Incidentally, the communication passage 477 meandering back and forth in the present embodiment receives the gaming ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 at the front position of the base plate 471, and then places the gaming ball at the rear position of the base plate 471. After moving it to the front position of the base plate 471 after moving it to the front position of the base plate 471, and moving the gaming ball to the rear position of the base plate 471 again, the second start winning opening 473 in front of the base plate 471. The game ball is guided to the upper position.

  In addition, a roof member 478 is provided which closes the upper side of the communication passage 477, and the game ball can not enter the communication passage 477 from the middle. Furthermore, the roof member 478 extends to the upper position of the second start winning opening 473, whereby basically, only the game ball via the communication passage 477 is awarded to the second start winning opening 473. It is configured to be impossible.

  On the right side of the first start winning opening 472 (first shutter 474), there is provided a receiving stand 479 which is connected to the upper surface of the first shutter 474 which is inclined downward to the left and is in the closed position. The game ball dropped to the receiving board 479 is guided to the first start winning opening 472 side. Further, at an upper position of the boundary between the first shutter 474 and the receiving table 479, a hook portion 481 extending forward from the base plate 471 is provided. The bowl portion 481 is configured such that the upper surface is inclined to the left and right so that the gaming ball does not stay on the upper surface.

  Further, although illustration is omitted, the game ball which has reached the second start winning device 33b is basically obtained by the game nail, the character or the like disposed on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment. It is guided to the reception stand 479 on the right side of the heel portion 481 and the heel portion 481. Furthermore, a gap through which the game ball can pass is also formed between the hook portion 481 and the roof member 478, and the game ball may reach the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 through the gap. is there. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, a first start winning opening 472, a second starting winning opening 473, a roof member 478, a receiving board 479, and a front wall portion 480 closing the front of the heel portion 481 are provided. The roof member 478, the receiving board 479, the ridge portion 481, and the front wall portion 480 are integrally formed of a transparent resin material.

  For example, in the roof member 478, the connecting passage 477 is connected to the first start winning opening 472 and above the part guiding the gaming ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the rear of the base plate 471. In the case of a configuration in which the gaming ball may fall on the upper surface of the region covering the upper surface, the upper surface of the region may be configured to be slightly inclined downward to the right.

  In addition, the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is provided with an assist winning opening 482 projecting forward from the base plate 471 at the upper right of the brim portion 481. When a game ball is detected by a detection switch (not shown) for counting the game balls entering the assist winning opening 482, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. Due to the presence of the assist winning opening 482, the winning opening to be entered increases when the gaming ball is fired toward the right side area (right-handed). Therefore, in the time reduction mode, the game is performed substantially without reducing the number of game balls (even if the number of winning balls when entering the second starting winning device 33b is smaller than that of the first starting winning device 33a). It can be carried out. Furthermore, in the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, more game balls are obtained (or the winning ball in the case of entering the ball is the first variable winning when the assist winning opening 482 is not present). Although it is less than the device 32a, it is possible to make up for it and make it possible to make up for it.

  In addition, a space through which the game ball can pass is formed between the assist winning opening 482 and the bowl portion 481. Most or all of the game balls flowing into the lower right area are guided to the upper position of the assist winning opening 482 by game nails or the like. Then, the gaming ball which has not entered the assist winning opening 482 is dropped and guided to the hook portion 481 and the receiving board 479, etc., and moves to the upper position of the first start winning opening 472.

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first shutter 474 of the second start-up winning device 33b is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 is in the closed position. The game balls that can not be won in the first starting winning opening 472 are guided to the second starting winning opening 473. For this reason, the game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 will be given the opportunity to try to enter the second starting winning opening 473, the game ball is the second start winning device 33b ( The possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473) can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the second start winning device 33b, the number of gaming balls entering the second start winning device 33b and the number of the second start winning device 33b are reached. 2) The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the second starting winning device 33b can be increased in proportion to the number of gaming balls not entering the starting winning device 33b. As a result, the game balls launched into the game area to enter the second start winning device 33b can be efficiently entered into the second start winning device 33b, and the shot balls are shot at the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the wasted balls that did not reach into the ball, and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to cause the second starting winning device 33b to enter the ball. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls enter the second start winning device 33b efficiently. Thus, it is possible to make the game progress slightly (do not reduce the holding balls, do not interrupt the variable display (play the game immediately so as to start changing after the stop display)).

  Also in the present embodiment, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the game ball is started second Since there is a possibility of entering the winning device 33b, even if the game ball continues to be fired, the wasted ball does not enter the second starting winning device 33b (the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473). Occurrence will be suppressed. Therefore, the difference between the gaming ball to be acquired between the player who performs the technical operation of measuring the timing for firing the gaming ball described in the first embodiment and the player who does not perform the technical operation is reduced. It can be (effectively eliminated). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  Further, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball are adjusted by the reception board 479 and the hook 481 disposed further upstream than the first start winning opening 472 and further by the game nails and character objects. It is done. For this reason, it is possible to reduce irregularity in the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball entering the upper position of the first start winning opening 472. Therefore, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 sends the gaming ball to the communication passage 477 to improve the probability of entering the second start winning opening 473. Can be made more secure.

  In addition, by sliding the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to enter the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 as the gaming ball falls. Above, for example, when closing the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 with a pivoting shutter, the gaming ball thought to have entered the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473, It is possible to prevent the situation where the camera is thrown up to the outside by being released to the shutter.

  Also, the gaming ball that has reached the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 is guided to the communication path 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 in the closed position. Thus, when the first shutter 474 for opening and closing the first start winning opening 472 is in the closed position, the game ball can be guided to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474. There is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding to 477, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, and suppression of cost increase can be achieved.

  Furthermore, it is configured to be able to enter the second start winning opening 473 only when the gaming ball passes through the communication passage 477, and to the communication passage 477 when the gaming ball is guided by the first shutter 474. It is configured to be accessible only. That is, although there is a possibility that the game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 enters the second start winning opening 473, the game ball that could not enter the second starting winning opening 473 is the first Since there is no possibility of entering the start winning opening 472, for example, when the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter directly also to the second starting winning opening 473 side without passing through the first shutter 474 etc. The possibility of the game ball entering the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 decreases since the case of one chance comes out instead of two chances). In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 472 is intended to be entered first, and if it is not possible, the order of entering the second starting winning opening 473 is to be adhered to Thus, the function and effect of improving the possibility of entering the second starting winning device 33b (the first starting winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473) can be achieved more reliably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is disposed on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second start winning device 33b. That is, regarding the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment, it takes a relatively long time before the gaming ball enters the second start winning device 33b and is discharged. More specifically, the first shutter of the second start winning device 33b is rectified first with a game nail or character, etc., and further, the collar portion 481 and the receiving board 479 are also rectified, and the first shutter 474 in the closed position , Passing through the communication path 477 that meanders back and forth, and passing downstream while changing the course in the orthogonal direction on the second shutter 475 in the closed position, finally, the second start winning device The game ball is discharged from 33b. Therefore, when the second start winning device 33b is on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball winning in the big hit state or small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. There is a risk that the game will not go smoothly (in particular, almost all of the game balls passing the right game area as in this example (except the game balls for winning the second variable winning device 32b) are the second start winning device 33b In the case of the configuration in which the user is guided to the above, the problem and the like can be eliminated in the present embodiment. The second start winning device 33b of this example takes a longer time (long distance) than the linear connection between the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. Since the communication passage 477 for guiding the game balls from the first start winning device 33a side to the second start winning device 33b side is provided, such effects can be further achieved.

  In addition, in the big hit state where the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the number of gaming balls falling to the second start winning device 33b can be reduced, and the second receiving the falling gaming balls It is possible to reduce the load on the start winning device 33b (the hook 481, the reception board 479, the first shutter 474, etc.) and the risk of damage.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63, focusing on the characteristic parts. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers. In FIG. 60, for the sake of convenience, a front decoration plate 903 and an entry part 931 to be described later are shown by dotted lines.

  As shown in FIG. 60 and the like, in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b as the start winning means and the first opening and closing winning means, and the second variable winning as the variable winning means and the second opening and closing winning means The device 32 b is unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, what united the 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b and the 2nd variable winning a prize device 32b is called "right-handed winning a prize unit 901".

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the right-handed winning unit 901 is provided on the downstream side of the through gate 34 as the normal starting means in the right side area. In the present embodiment, not all the game balls hit to the right pass through the through gate 34, but (almost) all game balls hit to the right are configured to enter the hit game winning unit 901. There is. In the present embodiment, in the right-handed winning unit 901, the second start winning device 33b is disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable winning device 32b is disposed on the downstream side thereof.

  The second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b of the fifth embodiment basically have a schematic configuration similar to that of the second starting winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, FIG. 62, etc., the second start winning device 33b of the fifth embodiment starts with the start winning opening 911 where the game ball moving in the game area can enter, and A start shutter 912 as a start opening / closing member for opening and closing the winning opening 911; a start solenoid 913 (see FIG. 61) for operating the start shutter 912; and a start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the start winning opening 911; And a second start winning switch 224b as a first winning detection means.

  The start shutter 912 is configured to be slidable back and forth, and is displaced between a closed position projecting into the game area and closing the start winning opening 911 and an open position exiting the game area and opening the start winning port 911 It is configured to Also in the present embodiment, the start shutter 912 is set to the open position when the player is elected in the ball entry support lottery performed by the main controller 261 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225 as the normal start detection means. The second start winning device 33b is in an open state.

  Further, the width of the start winning opening 911 of the present embodiment is relatively wide, and is, for example, about four to six times the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the right end portion of the start winning opening 911 is positioned above the left end portion. Corresponding to this, the start shutter 912 includes a connecting plate 912a extending vertically, an upper closing plate 912b extending right from the upper side of the connecting plate 912a, and a lower closing plate extending left from the lower side of the connecting plate 912a And 912c, and is configured in a step-like manner. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that are hit to the right and enter the right side area of the game area enter the right strike winning unit 901, and enter the right hitting prize unit 901 The game ball drops to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b, enters the start winning opening 911 if the start shutter 912 is in the open position, and the start shutter 912 When in the closed position, it rests on the upper closing plate 912b. Furthermore, the upper surfaces of the upper closing plate 912b and the lower closing plate 912c of the start shutter 912 are relatively gently inclined downward (for example, about 3 degrees to 10 degrees) toward the left.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 and the like, the second start winning device 33b of this embodiment is a ball entry point (first ball entry point) that can be won at the start winning opening 911 if the start shutter 912 is in the open position. That is, although it reached the upper position (the position immediately above the upper closing plate 912b) of the start winning opening 911 but the starting shutter 912 is in the closed position, the game ball could not enter the starting winning opening 911 Is guided to a position rearward of the start winning opening 911, and then, if the starting shutter 912 is in the open position again, a ball entry point (second entering point) that can be won in the starting winning opening 911; A detouring member 915 is provided to guide to the upper position of the start winning hole 911 (the position immediately above the lower closing plate 912c).

  More specifically, the detouring member 915 is mounted on the upper closing plate 912b of the starting shutter 912 in the closed position, guided by the upper closing plate 912b inclined downward to the left, and dropped to the left from the upper closing plate 912b The game ball received by the game ball received and guided backward (the back side of the game board 30) and the game ball guided by the introduction path 915a are dropped to the lower closing plate 912c if the start shutter 912 is in the closed position And a re-entry path 915b for guiding to a position where

  The front end portion of the introduction path 915 a protrudes to a position above the start winning hole 911. Further, the front end of the introduction path 915a is located approximately halfway between the start winning opening 911 in the widthwise direction, and the game ball enters the start winning hole 911 on either the right or left side of the introduction path 915a. Space is available for the ball. That is, when the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the introduction path 915a of the present embodiment covers the upper portion of the lower closing plate 912c on the connection plate 912a side to the upper position of the start winning opening 911 It is stretched and positioned below the upper closing plate 912b. Furthermore, when the introduction path 915a receives the game ball dropped from the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912 in the closed position, the introducing wall 915a prevents the game ball from falling to the left lower closing plate 912c side. Is equipped. Further, the gaming ball guiding surface (the surface supporting the lower surface side of the gaming ball) of the introduction path 915a is inclined relatively gently downward toward the rear and the left.

  The rear end of the reentry path 915b is connected to the rear end of the introduction path 915, and the gaming ball guided to the rear end of the introduction path 915 enters the rear end of the reentry path 915b. It will be. In addition, the gaming ball guiding surface of the re-entry path 915 (the surface supporting the lower surface side of the gaming ball) is inclined relatively gently downward toward the front and the left. Furthermore, the front end portion of the re-entry path 915b is located rearward of the start winning hole 911 and if the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the gaming ball discharged from the re-entry path 915b is the lower closing plate 912c. When mounted and the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the game ball discharged from the re-entry path 915 b is configured to enter the start winning opening 911. The gaming ball placed on the lower closing plate 912c is guided to the upper surface of the lower closing plate 912c which is inclined downward to the left, and is discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, the starting shutter 912 (in particular, the upper closing plate 912 b) and the bypass member 915 constitute a ball entering opportunity giving means (a starting ball entering chance giving means).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the second start winning device 33 b is a roof that covers the upper part of the introduction path 915 a of the detour member 915 and the portion of the start winning opening 911 covered by the lower closing plate 912 c of the start shutter 912. A member 917 is provided. The roof member 917 is configured such that the game ball can not enter the introduction path 915a or the re-entry path 915b from the midway position, and to the part of the start winning opening 911 covered by the lower blocking plate 912c, the upper blocking plate 912b, the introduction path 915a, and the re-entry path 915b are configured such that only game balls can enter. The roof member 917 is extended to the right of the introduction path 915a, etc., so that the game ball can be more reliably prevented from entering the introduction path 915a when the start shutter 912 is in the open position. You may

  Furthermore, the upper surface of the roof member 917 is inclined downward toward the right, and the gaming ball placed on the roof member 917 is guided to the right, and the upper closing plate 912b is located when the start shutter 912 is in the closed position. It is supposed to fall into In addition, the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 (entering the game area covered by the right-handed winning unit 901 by the game nail or character or the like arranged on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b The game ball is guided to the upper surface of the roof member 917 or a portion of the start winning hole 911 which is blocked by the upper blocking plate 912b.

  Then, when in the high ball entry state (probability change mode and time shortening mode), the right-handed game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901, and the position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the second start winning device 33b. If the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the gaming ball enters the start winning opening 911 if the start shutter 912 is in the open position. On the other hand, when the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted from entering the start winning opening 911 by the upper surface of the upper closing plate 912 b and is guided to the introduction path 915 a. The gaming ball guided to the introduction path 915a falls to a position corresponding to the lower closing plate 912c via the re-entry path 915b. In this embodiment, the standard time from the game ball entering the introduction path 915a to the discharge from the re-entry path 915b and the variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state, Alternatively, based on the winning of the ball entry support lottery in the high entering state, the interval time in which the second starting winning device 33b is closed when the plurality of second starting winning devices 33b are opened is substantially the same. It is designed to be the same.

  Therefore, even if entry into the start winning opening 911 of the gaming ball is restricted by the upper blocking plate 912b, when the gaming ball reaches a portion corresponding to the lower blocking plate 912c via the bypass member 915 The start shutter 912 is in the open position. As a result, almost all of the game balls that entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the high entering state win the second start winning device 33b (enter the starting winning opening 911), so that high In the ball entering state, it is possible to play a game without substantially reducing the number of gaming balls.

  The number of the second start winning switch 224b provided in the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment is one, and even if the game ball enters any portion of the start winning opening 911, such a game The ball is guided to and detected by the second start winning switch 224b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the second start winning device 33b. That is, the second variable winning device 32b includes a special winning opening 921 as a specific winning opening capable of entering game balls moving in the game area, and a special winning shutter 922 as a specific opening / closing member for opening and closing the special winning opening 921. , A big winning solenoid 923 (see FIG. 61) for operating the big winning shutter 922, a variable winning detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the big winning hole 921 and a second count switch 223b as a second winning detecting means Is equipped. Then, based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b, when winning in the jackpot state etc. in the lottery that is performed by the main controller 261, the big winning shutter 922 is set to the open position, the second variable winning device 32b is to be opened.

  In addition, also for the big winning shutter 922, the connecting plate 922a extending vertically, the upper closing plate 922b extending slightly upward from the upper side of the connecting plate 922a, and the left side from the lower side of the connecting plate 922a And a lower closing plate 922c which is inclined slightly downward toward the direction, and is configured in a step-like manner. Further, the second variable winning device 32b is guided to the game ball placed on the upper closing plate 922b of the big winning shutter 922 in the closed position, and is introduced to guide the game ball to the rear (the back side of the game board 30). A bypass member having a path 925a and a re-entry path 925b for guiding the gaming ball guided by the introduction path 925a to a position where it will fall to the lower closing plate 922c if the big winning shutter 922 is in the closed position It has 925. In the present embodiment, the big winning shutter 922 (in particular, the upper closing plate 922 b) and the bypass member 925 constitute a ball entering opportunity giving means (specific ball entering opportunity giving means).

  In addition, the second variable winning device 32b is also provided with a roof member 927 covering the upper part of the introduction path 925a of the bypass member 925 and the part of the big winning opening 921 covered by the lower closing plate 922c of the big winning shutter 922 There is. However, since the game ball hit to the right always passes through the second start winning device 33b to reach the second variable winning device 32b, the position of the game ball reaching the second variable winning device 32b, The moving direction and the like are substantially constant, and in this example, the gaming ball is not configured to be guided on the roof member 927 of the second variable winning device 32b. For this reason, the roof member 927 has no function of guiding the gaming balls to the upper closing plate 922b of the second variable winning device 32b by the upper surface thereof. The roof member 927 can be omitted.

  When the jackpot is in the jackpot state, the right-handed game ball enters the rightward winning unit 901 and passes through the second start winning device 33b to the upper closing plate 922b of the second variable winning device 32b. If the special winning shutter 922 is in the open position when it falls to the corresponding position, the gaming ball enters the special winning opening 921. On the other hand, when the big winning shutter 922 is in the closed position, the upper surface of the upper closing plate 922b restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 921 and the gaming ball is guided to the introduction path 925a. . The gaming ball guided to the introduction path 925a falls to the position corresponding to the lower closing plate 922c via the re-entry path 925b. In this embodiment, the standard time from the game ball entering the introduction path 925a to the discharge from the re-entry path 925b is designed to be substantially the same as the interval time in the jackpot state.

  Therefore, even if entry into the large winning opening 921 of the gaming ball is restricted by the upper blocking plate 922b, when the gaming ball reaches a portion corresponding to the lower blocking plate 922c via the bypass member 925 The big winning shutter 922 is located at the open position. As a result, almost all of the game balls that entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the jackpot-present big hit state (in the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the second starting winning device 33b before reaching the second variable winning device 32b) There is a nature), but it has become to win the second variable winning device 32b (enter the large winning opening 921), in the jackpot with jackpot state, the jackpot state smoothly without wasting the gaming ball Can proceed. In addition, the interval time of the jackpot state is more than the interval time when the second start winning device 33b is opened a plurality of times by the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 or the win in one ball entry support lottery. The length of the introduction path 925a and the re-entry path 925b of the second variable winning device 32b designed according to the interval time of the long jackpot state is the length of the introduction path 915a and the re-entry path 915b of the second start winning device 33b. It is configured to be longer than (see FIG. 61).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the right-handed winning unit 901 of the present embodiment enters the second starting winning device 33b, but since the starting shutter 912 is in the closed position, it wins the starting winning opening 911 A guide plate 919 for guiding the game balls discharged from the second start winning device 33b to the second variable winning device 32b is provided. The guide plate 919 of the present embodiment is provided so as to extend downward and to the left from the left end portion of the start winning opening 911 of the second start winning device 33 b. Then, the gaming balls guided by the guide plate 919 fall to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 922b of the big winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b. In addition, as described above, since the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 always enters the second start winning device 33b, the game ball is guided by the guide plate 919 to the second variable winning device 32b. The game ball guided by the guide plate 919 always falls to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 922b of the big winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b.

  The game ball guided by the guide plate 919 enters the big winning opening 921 if the big winning shutter 922 is in the open position, and if the big winning shutter 922 is in the closed position, the big closing prize is won by the upper closing plate 922 b. Entry of the ball into the mouth 921 is restricted, and guided to the introduction path 925a of the bypass member 925 by the upper surface of the upper closing plate 922b. Further, in the present embodiment, the guide plate 919 constitutes a ball entry guide means together with the start shutter 912.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 60, FIG. 61, etc., the right-handed winning unit 901 is a substantially plate-shaped base plate 902 attached in contact with the front of the game board 30, and a base plate 902 in front of the base plate 902. And a substantially plate-like member provided so as to cover the front of at least the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919. A front decoration plate 903 is provided.

  The front decoration plate 903 is made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the game balls moving between the front decoration plate 903 and the base plate 902 or the game board 30 are visible through the front decoration plate 903. It is done. Further, the front side of the front decoration plate 903 has an uneven shape that matches the motif of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 63).

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 62, the base plate 902 communicates with the opening formed in the game board 30, enters the start winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921 and a second start winning switch A discharge hole 904 for discharging the game ball detected by the second count switch 223b to the rear of the game board 30 is formed.

  Furthermore, the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b receive a game ball entered into the start winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921 and guide the game ball to the rear discharge hole 904 in the rear. A U-shaped ball receiving portion 905 is provided. As shown in FIG. 63, in the present embodiment, the front side of the ball receiving portion 905 is closed by the front decoration plate 903 (the front wall portion of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is the front decoration plate 903). In the present embodiment, the ball support portion 905, the roof members 917 and 927, and the guide plate 919 of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are integrally formed with the front decoration plate 903. Hereinafter, a member in which the front decoration plate 903, the ball receiving portion 905, the roof members 917 and 927, and the guide plate 919 are integrated is referred to as a “cover unit 907”.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, in the cover unit 907, mounting bosses 908 for attaching the cover unit 907 to the base plate 902 are integrated with the ball receiving portions 905 and the roof members 917 and 927. It is provided. The boss hole of the mounting boss 908 is open rearward. For the sake of convenience, the lead line of the mounting boss 908 in FIGS. 60 and 63 is drawn from the boss hole. On the other hand, mounting holes 906 (see FIG. 61) are formed in the base plate 902 corresponding to the mounting bosses 908, and the mounting bosses 908 and the mounting holes 906 are aligned to form the rear surface of the base plate 902. By fixing the screws from the side, the cover unit 907 is attached to the base plate 902. The base plate 902 is provided with a support rib 909 that protrudes forward and supports the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 905.

  Furthermore, the detour members 915 and 925 of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are integrally formed with the base plate 902 (see FIG. 62, etc.). In addition, the base plate 902 is formed with an opening and the like for inserting the start shutter 912 and the big winning shutter 922 and for installing the second start winning switch 224 b and the second count switch 223 b.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the right-handed winning unit 901 corresponds to a position corresponding to the entry route of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b, ie, the entrance to the right-handed winning unit 901. In the portion, an entrance part 931 which is substantially disk-shaped in a front view and is disposed in front of the front decoration plate 903 is provided. Furthermore, a rotary shaft 932 connected to the central portion on the rear surface side of the entrance character 931 and a product motor 933 as character product driving means for rotating the rotary shaft 932 are provided to drive the product motor 933. Thus, the inlet port 931 can be rotationally displaced. In addition, a cylindrical bearing portion 934 projecting forward from the base plate 902 and pivotally supporting the rotation shaft 932 is integrally formed with the base plate 902.

  Further, the inlet character 931 is formed with a substantially triangular notch 931a. In the present embodiment, the entry part 931 is configured to stop at three positions. That is, a normal position where the notch 931a is downward as shown in FIG. 64 (a), a high entry sphere corresponding position where the notch 931a is upward left, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), The notch 931a as shown in (c) is configured to be displaced between the winning corresponding position facing the upper right. Then, in the time reduction mode and the definite variation mode (first ball entry possible state), the entrance combination 931 is in the high entry ball corresponding position (first correspondence state) of FIG. In the ball entry possible state), the entry character 931 is in the winning corresponding position (second correspondence state) in FIG. 64 (c), and in the other state, the entrance character 931 is in the normal position in FIG. ). Thereby, if the entrance character 931 is visually recognized, it is impossible for the game ball to enter either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or to not enter either It can be understood whether it is a difficult state. The accessory motor 933 is electrically connected to the sub controller 262, and the sub controller 262 controls driving of the accessory motor 933 based on a command from the main controller 261.

  Further, the front part of the base plate 902 in which the bearing portion 934 is formed is not covered with the front decoration plate 903, whereby the entrance part 931 can be positioned in front of the front decoration plate 903. . As described above, the entrance combination 931 is positioned forward of the front decoration plate 903 and the rotation shaft 932 for displacing the rotation entry combination 931 and the bearing 934 supporting the same vertically and horizontally. Even if the entrance object 931 is displaced, the movement path of the gaming ball hardly changes. In addition, by filling the notch portion 931a of the entrance character 931 with a transparent material so as to completely form the entrance character 931 into a disk shape, it is configured such that no change occurs due to the movement path of the game ball It is also good.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 64, the front decoration plate 903 extends continuously from the lower position of the entry part 931 to a position corresponding to the front of the start winning opening 911 as shown in FIGS. A second guiding line 951 extending continuously from the lower position of the entrance part 931 to a position corresponding to the front of the large winning opening 921 and having a tip end in the form of an arrow; Is drawn. The first induction line 951 and the second induction line 952 have a translucent color different from the other portions of the front decoration plate 903. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 59, a chance seal 953 described as “chance” is attached to the front of the front decoration plate 903 at the tip of the arrow of the first induction line 951, and the second induction line 952 is At the tip of the arrow, a V seal 954 described as "V" is attached.

  Corresponding to this, the front surface of the inlet character 941 extends continuously with the first guiding line 951 in a front view in the position corresponding to the high ball entry position of FIG. When in the winning corresponding position of c), a line of sight introduction line 955 extending continuously with the second guiding line 952 in a front view is drawn. That is, when the entrance character 941 is in the high entry-ball correspondence position of FIG. 64 (b), the game ball can follow the second start winning device 33b by following the line of sight from the line of sight introduction line 955 to the first guidance line 951. 64C, and if the entrance character 941 is in the corresponding position for winning in FIG. 64 (c), the game is performed by tracing the line of sight from the line of sight introduction line 955 to the second guidance line 952 It can be inferred that the ball is entering the second variable winning device 32b. When the entry part 931 is in the normal position of FIG. 64 (a), the line of sight introduction line 955 is not continuous with either of the first induction line 951 and the second induction line 952.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the entrance combination 931 is configured to overlap with the front decoration plate 903 in the front-rear direction, but may be configured to be at the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decoration plate is constituted by the front decoration plate 903 and the entrance part 931. Furthermore, the state indicating means is configured by the entrance part 931 (and the first induction line 951, the second induction line 952, the chance seal 953, the V seal 954, the sight line introduction line 955).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in the base plate 902 on the right side of the bearing portion 934 and entering the area covered by the entrance attachment 931 in front as an end detection means for detecting passage of gaming balls The detection switch 941 is mounted (in FIG. 61, the entry detection switch 941 is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the present embodiment, the game ball hit to the right in the jackpot with jackpot state, the probability variation mode, and the time reduction mode is generally the notch 931a of the entrance prize 931 in the high entry corresponding position or the winning correspondence position. The game nails and the like are arranged so as to take a route that enters into. Furthermore, all the game balls entering into the game area on the back side of the right-turn winning unit 901 from the entrance character 931, particularly, in the present example, all the game balls hit in the right and entering the right side area enter the entry detection switch 941 In order to pass through, a guiding rib 942 integrally formed with the base plate 902 is provided so as to project forward from the left portion of the bearing portion 934 of the base plate 902, or a game nail is disposed. ing. In addition, the gaming ball having passed through the entry detection switch 941 is configured to drop to the position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the second start winning device 33b as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball guided to the right is guided toward the notch portion 931a of the entrance symbol 931 located at the position corresponding to the high entry ball and the position corresponding to the winning, and the right strike from the entrance symbol 931 Various members (game nail, roof member 917 of the second start winning device 33b, and the like for guiding all the gaming balls that have entered (entered) the unit 901 to the portion corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the starting shutter 912 The induction rib 942) constitutes a rectifying means. By the way, these rectifying means are configured to reach the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b while meandering the game ball hit to the right as much as possible so that the moving speed is not too high. .

  Furthermore, in the base plate 902, the left start (downstream side) portion of the bypass member 925 of the second variable winning device 32b does not enter the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b. A discharge detection switch 943 is mounted as discharge detection means for detecting a game ball. In the present embodiment, the entry detection switch 941 and the discharge detection switch 943 are electrically connected to the main control device 261. Furthermore, main controller 261 is provided with a remaining ball counter for counting the number of gaming balls present inside right-handed winning unit 901, and based on the detection of entry detection switch 941 The remaining ball counter is counted down based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, the detection of the second count switch 223b, and the detection of the discharge detection switch 943.

  In addition, when the detection of the entry detection switch 941 is performed in the jackpot with jackpot state, definite variation mode, and time shortening mode, along with the entry (entering) of the game ball to the right-handed winning unit 901 Generate sound effects. That is, when detection of the entry detection switch 941 is performed, the main control device 261 outputs a command indicating that the gaming ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control In the device 262, based on the command, processing is performed to derive the corresponding sound effect from the speaker SP. In the present embodiment, the function of the main controller 261 and the sub controller 262 for generating sound effects and the speaker SP constitute an approach sound generation means.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60, in the base plate 902, screw holes 945 for screwing the base plate 902 to the game board 30 are formed. Although the screw holes 945 are formed at a plurality of places, the screw holes 945 are also formed at a place where the front is covered by the front decoration plate 903 and the inlet part 931. In the present embodiment, the cover unit 907 including the front decoration plate 903 and the like is attached to the base plate 902, and then the right-handed winning unit 901 is attached to the game board 30. Therefore, when screw holes 945 are formed in a portion of the base plate 902 which is covered with the front decoration plate 903 at the front, attachment of the base plate 902 becomes difficult or impossible.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, a tool hole 947 is formed in a portion of the front decoration plate 903 corresponding to the front of the screw hole 945 so that a driver as a tool can be inserted. Therefore, the base plate 902 can be securely attached (screw fixed) to the game board 30 from the front side of the game board 30 without any trouble. In addition, after the base plate 902 is attached to the game board 30, the inlet character 931 is attached by inserting the rotary shaft 932 into the bearing portion 934, etc. The screw fixing can be performed commonly for those provided at the site to be treated.

  Furthermore, the front decoration plate 903 extends relatively widely and extends to the area where the game nail is provided. The front and back position of the head of the ordinary game nail is substantially the same as the front and back position of the front decoration plate 903, and it is impossible to arrange the front decoration plate 903 at the place where the game nail is installed. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the front decoration plate 903 is formed with a nail exposure hole 948 for exposing the gaming nail forward. By this, the front decoration plate 903 can be arranged in the area where the game nails are installed, and when the game nails provided in the installation range of the front decoration plate 903 need to be maintained, The maintenance of the game nail can be performed without removing the right-handed winning unit 901 or the like.

  The game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 but has not won the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is detected by the discharge detection switch 943, and then the front decoration is made. The game is moved to a game area not covered by the front decoration plate 903 by being flipped by a game nail provided within the installation range of the plate 903 or the like. That is, before the game ball enters the out port 36, the game ball is configured to jump out from the area covered by the front decoration plate 903 so that the second start winning device 33b and the second variable win It is easy to grasp that neither of the devices 32b has won a prize.

  In addition, the front decoration plate 903 includes the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b, the bypass member 915, the guide plate 919, the big winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b, and the bypass member 925. At the corresponding position, a ball clogging elimination hole 949 (confirmation hole) is formed. If it is considered that a clogged ball has occurred in the right-handed winning unit 901, the ball cramping hole 949 is passed through the passage of the gaming ball in the right-handed winning unit 901 to confirm the occurrence of the clogged ball. If it is, the clogging is eliminated through the clogging elimination hole 949. When the ball clogging eliminating hole 949 and the nail exposing hole 948 are not separated so much and are positioned in a straight line, they are formed in a continuous line.

  In the present embodiment, the game nail is disposed also in the area where the entrance character 931 is installed. With regard to such a game nail, the projection length from the front of the game board 30 is short, and it is configured so as not to inhibit the rotational displacement of the entrance object 931. In addition, the game nails provided on the game board 30 are all the same, and the amount of driving into the game board 30 for the game nails disposed in the installation area of the entrance character 931 is longer than that of other game nails, As a result, the forward protrusion length is shorter. However, as for the game nail provided corresponding to the nail exposure hole 948, the driving amount to the game board 30 is the same as that of a general game nail, and the projection length is not shortened.

  In addition, in the jackpot presence jackpot state, the game ball which entered the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b for each big hit round in a predetermined part (second display means) of the decorative symbol display device 42 A display is provided to teach the number of The count of the number of balls entered is not triggered by detection of the game ball by the entry detection switch 941, but is detected by the first count switch 223a or the second count switch 223b. It takes place as a trigger.

  In the present embodiment, the function of deriving the count display constitutes the ball entry teaching means. Moreover, while the variable display of the special display devices 43L, 43R is not performed during the jackpot state, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed even during the jackpot state, and the result of winning the ball entry support lottery is taught When it is determined that the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, the gaming ball is configured to be able to win a prize. Furthermore, even during the jackpot state, when the game ball passes through gate 34 or wins the second start winning device 33b, the corresponding variable display (information about) is held and stored, and the corresponding hold The lamps 46a, 46b, 44 will be lit.

  Here, the right-handed winning switch process executed every predetermined time in the normal process of the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether there is detection information of the entry detection switch 941 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball counter in step S4802. Subsequently, in step S4803, it is determined whether or not the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state with big balls being hit (hereinafter referred to simply as the big balls with big balls). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, in step S4804, a sound effect (entry sound effect A) corresponding to the game ball entering (entering) the right-handed winning unit 901 in the out-of-the-counter big hit is output The setting of the command to make it go (enter sound effect A output processing) is performed. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 during the jackpot present jackpot state, almost all of the game balls (when the winning support lottery is won during the jackpot state) "There is a possibility that the second start winning device 33b will enter the second start winning device 33b) will enter the second variable winning device 32b," enter sound effect A "is" to the second variable winning device 32b It can be said that the sound effects corresponding to entering the ball.

  After step S4804, the game ball is detected by the entry detection switch 941 against the remaining ball monitoring timer used to check whether the game ball is clogged inside the right-handed winning unit 901 or not in step S4805. The value from the time until the detection by the discharge detection switch 943 is long is set to a value corresponding to the scheduled stay time that has been set to be long.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4803, it is determined in step S4806 whether or not the ball is in a high ball-in state (a probability change mode or a time reduction mode). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4806, in step S4807, a sound effect (entry sound effect B) corresponding to the game ball entering (entering) is output to the right-handed winning unit 901 in the high entering state Perform setting of the command for entering (advancing effect sound B output processing). After step S4807, the process proceeds to step S4805 described above.

  It should be noted that the entering sound effect B to the right-handed winning unit 901 in the high entering state is a sound different from the entering effect sound A in the out-ball with big hit state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 during the high entry state, almost all of the game balls (the timing is shifted due to a ball clog or an unexpected bounce, etc. The “enter sound effect B” is input to the “second start winning device 33 b” because the second start winning device 33 b will enter the second starting winning device 33 b) except in the case where the start winning hole 911 is skipped. It can be said that the sound effects corresponding to the sphere.

  If NO in step S4806, in step S4808, setting of a command for causing the player to output a left strike announcement to teach the player to hit the left by the decorative symbol display device 42 etc. I do. That is, in a state other than jackpot present big hit state or high ball entry state, the game is progressed even if the game ball is hit to the right (the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b is allowed to enter the game ball) ) Is difficult, and by striking the game ball to the left, the game can be made to progress relatively smoothly. For this reason, when it is detected that the right strike is being performed in such a state, a left strike announcement for prompting the player to hit the left is derived. After step S4808, the process proceeds to step S4805 described above.

  After step S4805 or when the determination in step S4801 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4809, and it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the discharge detection switch 943. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4809, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining ball counter in step S4810. In the present embodiment, when the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b and the second count switch 223b is confirmed in the switch reading process (step S301 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process of the main control device 261. In addition, the processing of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining ball counter is also performed.

  After step S4810 or when a negative determination is made in step S4809, the process proceeds to step S4811, and it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter is 0 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S4811, that is, if the number of gaming balls discharged from the right-handed winning unit 901 is greater than the number of gaming balls entered into the right-handed winning unit 901, After execution of count error processing in step S4812, this processing ends. The contents of the count error processing can be appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine 10. For example, notification by the pachinko machine 10 by the decorative symbol display device 42, lamp, sound etc., pausing the pachinko machine 10 New variation display and jackpot round are not started), and the error information is output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside such as a hall computer or island facility via the external terminal board 240.

  When the determination in step S4811 is affirmative, in step S4813, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter exceeds zero. If a negative determination is made in step S4813, that is, if the value of the remaining ball counter is 0, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S4813 is affirmative, in step S4814, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S4814, the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in step S4815, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4814, that is, if there is a high possibility that a ball clogging has occurred inside the right-handed winning unit 901, timer error processing is performed in step S4816, and then the main processing is performed. Finish. The contents of the time error processing can be appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine 10. For example, notification by the pachinko machine 10 by the decorative symbol display device 42, a lamp, a sound, etc., pausing the pachinko machine 10 New variation display and jackpot round are not started), and the error information is output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside such as a hall computer or island facility via the external terminal board 240.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is suspended, the fact that the variable display is suspended is taught in the lighting mode of the suspension lamps 46a and 46b (see FIG. 59). As shown in FIG. 67 (a), displaying the entering detection response display and the holding icon 962 as a holding information object in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42 (hereinafter also referred to as “hold display area 961”) But I am teaching. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the sub control device 262 receives from the main control device 261 a signal indicating that the detection of the entry detection switch 941 has been performed in the high ball entry state, to the second start winning device 33b. While generating the sound effect corresponding to the entering of the ball, the display processing (right-handed holding icon display processing) of the temporary holding icon (the pseudo holding icon 963) in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. It should be noted that a signal indicating that the start winning switch 224a, 224b, count switch 223a, 223b, entry detection switch 941, discharge detection switch 943 have been detected from the main controller 261 to the sub controller 262 Are configured to be output.

  Such right-handed hold icon display processing will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4901, it is determined whether there is detection information of the entry detection switch 941 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the ball is in a high ball-in state (a probability change mode or a time shortening mode). If a negative determination is made in step S4902, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S4902 is affirmative, in step S4903, the number of pending variable display (second variable display) based on the entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is less than four that is the upper limit It is determined whether or not If the negative determination is made in step S4903, that is, if the second variable display can not be suspended any more, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4903, in step S4904, a pseudo hold icon display for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the first-in-first-inserted ball detection correspondence display and the pseudo hold icon 963 as a pseudo hold information object. Do the processing. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the hold icon 962 of the present embodiment is an image object imitating a floating ring, and the pseudo hold icon 963 is an image object like the hold icon 962 blurred (thinned). It has become. Further, in the pseudo holding icon display process, the number of fluctuation displays (variation information) currently held is confirmed, and the corresponding position (the game ball detected by the entry detection switch 941 at this time) When the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the pseudo holding icon 963 is displayed on the position where the holding icon 962 indicating the holding of the corresponding variable display is displayed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a bubble display 964 in which a large number of bubbles are rising up from below is performed in front of the pseudo retention icon 963 in association with the pseudo retention icon 963. The player is informed that there may be a change in the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 by performing a fluid display that reduces the visibility of the pseudo hold icon 963, such as the bubble display 964. You can guess.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 (the entrance object 931) is detected by the entry detection switch 941 by performing the process of displaying the pseudo storage icon 963, the game player is high. When the ball is in the ball entering state, the entry sound effect B corresponding to the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b (meaning winning) is output, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, the second starting winning device A pseudo hold icon 963 indicating that the variable display is to be held will be displayed based on the entry to the ball 33b. Incidentally, while the time from the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance character 931) to being detected by the entry detection switch 941 is approximately 0.1 seconds to 0.5 seconds, In the high ball entry condition, the time from the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance jack 931) to the detection of the second start winning switch 224b takes approximately 1 second to 8 seconds ing.

  After step S4904, in step S4905, a pseudo holding flag indicating that the pseudo holding icon 963 is being displayed is set to ON, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4906 whether the pseudo hold flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4906, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4906, it is determined in step S4907 whether or not there is detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, the pseudo holding flag is turned off in step S4908, and the present process ends. That is, the case where the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is performed is the case where the gaming ball enters the second start winning device 33b as planned in the high entering state, and the second start is also performed. If the detection of the winning switch 224b is performed, various lottery (such as a lottery for success or failure) is performed, and information indicating the result is output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 as the first command. . Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the mode of the hold icon 962 based on the information included in the advance command, the result of various lottery performed triggered by the reception of the advance command, etc., and the decoration symbol display device 42 is selected. Display. Of course, when the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 962 is to be displayed, the hold icon 962 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 963.

  For example, in the high entering state, when there is an entering of the second starting winning device 33b from the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and it indicates that the corresponding second variation display is suspended, FIG. As shown in (b), the bubble display 964 disappears and the pseudo hold icon 963 is switched to the hold icon 962 (in this example, the pseudo hold icon 963 blurs the (normal) hold icon 962 Therefore, if the outline and the hue of the pseudo hold icon 963 are clarified, the hold icon 962 is obtained). Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), there are cases where the contents of the corresponding variable display may be suggested by changing the normal and the visual recognition mode as the holding icon 962. The third reserve icon 962 from the left in FIG. 67C is an aspect that teaches that a jackpot state occurs.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4907, it is determined in step S4909 whether or not detection information of the discharge detection switch 943 is present. If a negative determination is made in step S4909, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4909, display is performed in step S4910 to erase the pseudo hold icon 963. That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball that enters the right-handed winning unit 901 and is detected by the entry detection switch 941 is always the second start winning switch 224 b, the second count switch 223 b, and the discharge detection switch 943. Either will be detected. Therefore, as a case where the detection of the discharge detection switch 943 is performed in a state where the pseudo storage icon 963 is displayed, the gaming ball detected by the entry detection switch 941 in the high entering state is the second start winning switch The false hold icon 963 displayed in anticipation of the detection of the game ball by the second start winning switch 224b, which is not detected in the step 224b, is to be erased in the step S4910. . Incidentally, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 67 (d).

  Thereafter, in step S4911, the pseudo holding flag is turned off, and the processing ends. Note that instead of the determination in step S4901 and step S4902, it may be determined whether or not a signal indicating that the entry effect sound B is output has been received. The process may proceed to step S4903 in the affirmative determination, and may proceed to step S4906 in the negative determination.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized as the right-handed winning unit 901, and the start of the second start winning device 33b is performed. The start shutter 912 is in the closed position despite reaching the ball entry point (in this example, the upper position of the start winning hole 911 in this example) even if the shutter 912 is in the open position and reaches the entry point where the start winning hole 911 can be won. The game ball that could not be won in the start winning opening 911 in the opening position of the second prize winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b can enter the big winning opening 921 entry point (this example Then, a guide plate 919 for guiding to a position above the large winning opening 921) is provided.

  Therefore, the game ball that can not enter the one of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b because the one is closed, the other ball entry point (entrance) It is possible to prevent the situation where the game area is discharged without being reached. Thereby, the possibility that the game ball which could not enter one of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b can increase the possibility of entering the other can be surely increased. It is possible to suppress a situation where the game ball hit (right-handed) in the right side area of the game area is discharged from the game area without being won by any winning device. As a result, among the right-handed game balls, the number of game balls entering a certain winning device and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any winning device It is possible to suppress that a relatively large variation occurs in the ratio, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the variation.

  Furthermore, if the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the second start winning device 33b can play the game ball at a first ball entry point (a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912) that can enter the start win 911 When the start shutter 912 is in the closed position when the start shutter 912 arrives, if the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the second entry point where the start winning opening 911 can enter (the lower shutter of the start shutter 912 A detouring member 915 (introduction passage 915a and re-entry passage 915b) guiding to a position corresponding to the plate 912c.

  In addition, with regard to the second variable winning device 32b, if the big winning shutter 922 is in the open position, the first entry point where the player can enter the big winning opening 921 (a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 922b of the big winning shutter 922 When the big winning shutter 922 is in the closed position when the gaming ball reaches the), the second winning point that can enter the big winning opening 921 if the big winning shutter 922 is in the open position A detour member 925 (introduction passage 915a and re-entry passage 925b) for guiding to a position corresponding to the lower closing plate 922c of the big winning shutter 922 is provided.

  Accordingly, although the start winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921 have been reached immediately above, since the starting shutter 912 and the big winning shutter 922 are in the closed position, the starting winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921 can not be won. For the game ball, the opportunity to try winning in the start winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921 will be given again, and the possibility of the game ball entering the starting winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921 is increased. Can. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the start winning hole 911 or the big winning hole 921 in the high entering ball state or the out-pilled jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the start winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921 to the number of gaming balls not entering the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921 is the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the mouth 921 can be increased. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls necessary to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls are efficiently inserted into the start winning hole 911 and the big winning hole 921. By playing the ball, it is possible to make the game progress slightly.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is made to enter the right-handed winning unit 901 (enter the ball) in the high entering state, (almost) all the game balls will win the second start winning device 33b. If the game ball is made to enter the right-handed winning unit 901 (enters the ball) in the jackpot presence jackpot state in which the second variable prize device 32b is in the open state, almost all the game balls are the second variable prize device 32b Will win a prize. Therefore, the above-mentioned operation and effect are more surely exhibited, and it becomes more difficult for a player to make a difference in the out-balls in the high ball-in state and the out-rolled balls having the second variable winning device 32b open. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest in the game is reduced due to the difference in the payout (unfair feeling). Further, in the high ball entry state and the popping out jackpot state, since the player only strikes the right without worrying about the decrease of the game balls, etc., the game can be advanced more easily.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the game ball is hit to the right, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a wasted ball (the game ball does not win any winning device) and to smoothly (promptly) advance the game smoothly Although the action and effect can be achieved, the behavior of the gaming ball at the time of right-handing is almost the same if it reaches the right-handed winning unit 901. In this respect as well, in the present embodiment, not only the right-handed route (right-hand side area) but also the left-handed route (left-hand side area) are aligned. By adjusting the position to be taken out, the behavior of the gaming ball will be changed relatively widely. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a decrease in interest or the like is caused due to the behavior of the gaming ball becoming substantially constant, and enjoy the behavior of the gaming ball in the state of striking the gaming ball in the left side area The original fun of the pachinko machine 10 can be maintained.

  On the other hand, even if it is expected that the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b can be expected to be expected by launching the game ball in the right side area when the player is in an advantageous state, It is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball does not enter the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b well. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is hit to the right, it is possible to eliminate the stress that the game ball does not enter the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, and to proceed with the game comfortably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is located upstream of the gaming area with respect to the second variable winning device 32b, and the game ball that did not enter the second start winning device 33b is the second variable. It is configured to be guided to the winning device 32b. That is, since the second variable prize device 32b of the present embodiment is provided with the detour member 925, the second variable prize device 32b in which the gaming ball having reached the second variable prize device 32b in the closed state maintains the closed state. It takes a relatively long time to get out of the office. Therefore, when the second start winning device 33b is positioned downstream of the second variable winning device 32b via the guide plate 919, the game ball may not easily reach the second variable winning device 32b. become. In particular, in general, the interval when the second start winning device 33b is opened a plurality of times (a closed period during the open period) and the second variable winning device 32b is opened a plurality of times This tendency is more pronounced when the interval of the jackpot state is longer than the interval of the jackpot state to be performed, and the bypass member 925 of the second variable winning device 32b is designed accordingly.

  In this respect, by arranging the second start winning device 33b on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b as in the present embodiment, the game ball is hit and aimed at the second start winning device 33b, The time until the second start winning device 33b is reached can be made relatively short, and smooth game progress can be achieved. In addition, for example, when the second start winning device 33b is on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 32b via the guide plate 919, the game ball to the second variable winning device 32b in a state in which the closed state is maintained If it reaches, the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is almost certain, but it is detected by the second starting winning device 33b until it actually enters the second starting winning device 33b Because it takes a relatively long time), there is a concern that the time lag will give a sense of discomfort, but by taking the second start winning device 33b upstream of the second variable winning device 32b, it takes The occurrence of discomfort can be avoided.

  In the jackpot state, the game ball may win also in the second starting winning device 33b located upstream of the second variable winning device 32b, but in the present embodiment, the second starting winning device 33b There is one winning ball based on the winning, and it is not involved in the increase or decrease of the game balls possessed by the player. However, while being able to hold the fluctuation display of special symbol display devices 43L and 43R, the situation that the length of the big hit round becomes too short can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball hit to the right always enters (enters) the right-hit winning unit 901 by the game nail or the like, and the game nail, the guide rib 942, and the second start winning device 33b. The roof member 917 and the like are guided to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b. That is, the second variable winning device 32b can be reached only when the gaming ball is guided by the guide plate 919 via the bypass member 915 of the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the second variable winning device 32b is reached without the game ball passing through the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to comply with the order of attempting to enter the second start winning device 33b first, and if it is not good, to try to enter the second variable winning device 32b, the second start winning device The action and effect of improving the possibility of entering the ball into the second variable winning device 32b and the second variable winning device 32b are more reliably achieved.

  Further, the right-handed game ball moves in the game area while being meandered by the game nail, the guide rib 942 and the like until being guided by the second start winning device 33b. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the speed of the gaming ball becoming too fast, etc., and it is possible to reduce irregularity in the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, the flow of gaming balls in the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919 can be made relatively smooth.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the base plate 902 of the right-handed winning unit 901 and the front face of the gaming board 30 are provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass, and the second start winning device 33b, the second variable. A winning device 32 b and a transparent or translucent front decoration plate 903 covering the front of the guide plate 919 are provided. The front decorative plate 903 can enhance the sense of unity of the second start winning device 33 b, the second variable winning device 32 b, and the guide plate 919. That is, the second start winning device 33b is relatively free from being confused by the structure of the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919 and the complicated movement of the game balls moving these. If the gaming ball reaches the part covered with the front decoration plate 903 in the high entry state frequently opened or the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state (on the back side of the front decoration plate 903 If the game ball enters the ball), it can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is entered. In addition, the portion covered with the front decoration plate 903 has the functions of both the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, so the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device As compared with the conventional pachinko machine 10 in which only the apparatus 32 b and the apparatus 32 b are separately present, novelty can be provided, and new effects and the like using this can be derived.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an entrance accessory 931 is provided at a portion corresponding to the entrance of the right-turn winning unit 901. For this reason, it can be made easy to understand where the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901 is. In addition, the entrance combination 931 is provided so as to be capable of rotational displacement, and the posture changes in the high ball entry state, the exit ball with jackpot state, and the other states. For this reason, it is not possible for the game ball to enter either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or both, even if the entrance character 931 is kept visible. It can be understood whether it is a state. In addition, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and effect by utilizing the rotating entrance character 931, and by displacing the entrance character 931, it is made more noticeable as a mark of the launch position of the game ball or You can also

  In addition, even if it is in a displaced state, the entrance character 931 is configured not to change the movement path of the game balls in the game area. That is, although the entrance character 931 is a character (decor) to the last, and is configured to be displaceable, the displacement does not affect the movement path of the gaming ball. For this reason, even if the entrance character 931 is moved in a complicated manner, etc., it is possible to well enter the gaming ball into the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, and it is relatively free. Various information can also be suggested and taught by the aspect of the entry part 931 which can also be designed. Furthermore, since the inlet character 931 is configured to be rotationally displaced, a mechanism for rotating the inlet character 931 while configuring so that no change occurs in the movement path of the gaming ball as the inlet character 931 is displaced. Can be avoided.

  Further, the front decoration plate 903 of this embodiment is a part of the right-turn winning unit 901, and is integrally formed with the ball receiving portion 905 of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b. The screw is fixed to a base plate 902 fixed to the screw 30. Therefore, in order to attach the front decoration plate 903 to the resin base 38 and the front frame set 14 of the inner frame 12, it is not necessary to change the shapes of the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the pachinko machine 10, such as exchanging only the game board 30 and various members attached thereto, and reusing the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 and the like as it is. In addition, since the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized and attached to the game board 30, the pachinko machine 10 of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is provided. As a result, the relative position between the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b can be determined more precisely.

  Furthermore, the front decoration plate 903 is formed with a nail exposure hole 948 for penetrating the front and back and exposing the game nail set up on the front side of the game board to the front. With the nail exposure hole 948, the front decoration plate 903 can be relatively widely used without providing a game nail in the vicinity of the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b or worrying about the arrangement of the game nail ( The outer peripheral edge of the front decoration plate 903 can be provided as far as possible from the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b. In particular, since the front decoration plate 903 (and the entrance character 931) is located in front of the portion through which the game balls of the game area pass, it is closer to the player and the front of the game board 30, around the game area, In addition to the front face of the front face frame set 14 and the like, it is possible to perform three-dimensional decoration, expression of a motif across the inner circumferential side and outer circumferential side of the game area, and the like. As a result, it is possible to realize a highly creative visual aspect.

  Moreover, by forming the nail exposure holes 948 in the front decoration plate 903, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration plate 903 so as to avoid the game nails. And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail. In addition, by making the driving amount to the game board 30 deeper than the other game nails behind the entrance character 931, the game nails in which the projection length from the game board 30 is relatively short are arranged. ing. By providing these configurations, the area where the gaming ball can move (when the game board 30 is viewed from the front) is narrowed in exchange for the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931 being installed. As well as avoiding such a situation, the game nails can be arranged even in the installation range of the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931 so as to avoid the game nail (without arranging the game nail so as to avoid the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931). Improved the design of the right-handed winning unit 901 (for example, as in the above embodiment, a wider dynamic decoration including the range in front of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b) And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail can be compatible.

Furthermore, even when maintenance of the game nail (eg, angle adjustment) is required due to changes in the angle of the game nail due to long years of use, etc., such work can be performed without removing the front decoration plate 903. Further, for example, compared with the case where a resin rod-like body integrally formed on the front decoration plate 903 is provided instead of the game nail, the durability can be improved, etc. It is not necessary to increase the distance between the game board 30 and the plate glass of the glass unit 137 in order to install the decorative plate 903 and the entrance character 931, and the basic design of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and pachinko machine The front and back width of 10 will be expanded (if the installation space of pachinko machine 10 is decided in the game hall etc. and the front and back width is increased, the front of pachinko machine 10 will be close to the front player side and the entire game area will be overlooked Can be avoided).

  In addition, since the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931 are provided at a position where the player can not make contact from the player side behind the glass unit 137, the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part It is possible to prevent a situation in which the object 931 is damaged or the pachinko machine 10 is detached. Furthermore, since the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931 are separated from the plate glass of the glass unit 137, generation of abnormal noise due to the vibration of the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931 being transmitted to the transparent body. Prevents the front decoration plate 903 and the entrance part 931 from being damaged by the manufacturing error or the like. Can be prevented.

  The front decoration plate 903 is formed with a ball clogging eliminating hole 949 penetrating in the front and back direction corresponding to the path of the game ball. Therefore, even if ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decoration plate 903, it can be eliminated without removing the front decoration plate 903 via the ball clogging elimination hole 949. Furthermore, the visibility of the game ball passing the back side of the front decoration plate 903 can be improved.

  In addition, the cover unit 907 including the front decorative plate 903 and the ball receiving portion 905 is provided with a mounting boss 908 having a boss hole opened rearward, and the cover unit 907 is formed of the base plate 902. The cover unit 907 and the base plate 902 are mounted by bringing the mounting boss 908 into alignment with the mounting hole formed in the base plate 902 while abutting the front surface, and screwing from the rear side of the base plate 902. It is done. For this reason, it is possible to avoid that a screw or the like used for attaching the front decoration plate 903 is visually recognized on the back surface side of the front decoration plate 903 and to avoid a decrease in designability caused by the visual recognition. Can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the base plate 902 is fixed by screws also when attached to the game board 30, but basically, the front of the base plate 902 is covered with the front decoration plate 903 and the base plate As for the screw holes 945 formed in the base plate 902 for fixing the screws 902 to the game board 30, there are also those formed in the portion covered by the front decoration plate 903. On the other hand, in the front decorative plate 903, tool holes 947 are formed at positions corresponding to the fronts of the screw holes 945 of the base plate 902. Therefore, even if the front decoration plate 903 covers the front of the base plate 902, a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted through the tool hole 947 to relatively easily attach the base plate 902 to the game board 30. be able to. Furthermore, although the tool hole 947 is formed, the tool hole 947 and the screw hole 945 are separated from each other in the front and back direction, so basically the screw screwed into the screw hole 945 is the front decorative plate 903. It will be visible over the world. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a screw screwed into the screw hole 945 from the front, and it is possible to reduce a decrease in designability or the like when the screw is visually recognized.

  The right-handed winning unit 901 is locked to the game board 30 by the locking means, or the cover unit 907 is locked to the base plate 902 attached to the game board 30 by the locking means. Although it is conceivable, there is a concern that the mounting state may become unstable or it may not be removed once mounted. In this respect, as in the fifth embodiment, after the base plate 902 and the cover unit 907 are attached, the base plate 902 is fixed to the game board 30 with a screw through the tool hole 947 of the front decoration plate 903. By doing this, it is possible to firmly attach the right-handed winning unit 901 to the game board 30 (it does not hold back even if the game ball collides) and also to remove the right-handed winning unit 901 relatively easily. it can.

  In addition, an entrance detection switch 941 for detecting a game ball that has entered (entered) the right-handed winning unit 901 is provided at the entrance portion of the right-handed winning unit 901 (rear of the entrance character 931). In the present embodiment, the game ball hit to the right always enters the right-turn winning unit 901, and all the game balls entering the right-turn winning unit 901 are detected by the entry detection switch 941 and the second variable winning always It is guided to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912 of the device 32b. Thus, the provision of the entry detection switch 941 relatively quickly generates a reaction to the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901, which is an area covered by the entrance object 931 and the front decoration plate 903. (In this example, sound effects are generated), and it is possible to intensify the image that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901. Therefore, the area (right-handed winning unit 901) covered with the entrance character 931 and the front decoration plate 903 is more reliably recognized as a winning area in which the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are combined. It is possible to further strengthen the image that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 as well.

  Furthermore, after the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance character 931), the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b (especially, the second variable winning device located downstream of the gaming area) It is feared that a relatively long time lag will occur before the game ball is detected in 32b), and the notification of ball entry is performed at the timing of detection by the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b. Also, it is difficult to know what the notification corresponds to (the memory of the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 is a little far away) and it is difficult to know what it corresponds to, and when entering the right-handed winning unit 901 Even if there is no response, the player feels uneasy. In this respect, by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941, as a player, the gaming ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 is firmly recognized by the pachinko machine 10 (count The sense of security can be obtained because it is understood that It should be noted that since the ball entry detection sound based on the detection information of the entry detection switch 941 differs depending on whether the ball is in the high ball entry state or the ball exit jackpot, the gaming ball is (2) It can be taught which of the start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is in the state of entering the ball or in the state of not being able to enter the ball. In addition, based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect (pseudo-hold icon 963) such that the variable display may be held (the hold icon 962 may be displayed). Can be diversified.

  Also in this embodiment, depending on the game situation, the game ball is hit to the left (left side area) of the variable display unit 35 (left hit) or the right of the variable display unit 35 (right To hit the right area), but by knowing that the entrance detection switch 941 is provided, it is understood that the user is hitting the right when the situation should be left. Can. Therefore, based on such information, notification (left-handed announcement) indicating the correct travel route can be performed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, of the gaming balls that enter the right-handed winning unit 901 and are detected by the entry detection switch 941, both enter the second start winning device 33 b and the second variable winning device 32 b. A discharge detection switch 943 for detecting a game ball that has not been made is provided, and a remaining ball counter capable of counting the number of game balls remaining in the right-handed winning unit 901 is provided. Therefore, based on the detection information of the entry detection switch 941, the second start winning switch 224b, the second count switch 223b, and the discharge detection switch 943, there is no incorrect entry or the right-handed winning unit 901 It is possible to confirm whether or not ball clogging occurs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls that have won the second variable winning device 32b during each big hit round in the jackpot presence big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state (second count switch 223b Is detected on the decorative symbol display device 42). Therefore, the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32b among the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b of the right-handed winning unit 901 by the count display on the decorative symbol display device 42. You can understand things more clearly.

  In addition, when there are two or more winning balls based on the winning in the second start winning device 33b, the game ball can be won by the player as the game balls enter the second starting winning device 33b in the jackpot presence jackpot state The number of When adopting such a configuration, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the total number of gaming balls that have won the second start winning device 33b during the jackpot presence jackpot state so that the degree of increase of such gaming balls is visible. Alternatively, the total number of winning balls based on the entry may be displayed.

  In addition, with regard to the game ball that has been hit to the right and entered the right strike winning unit 901 but has not entered the second start winning device 33 b or the second variable winning device 32 b, the front decoration plate 903 or the entrance It is configured to move (is ejected) to the game area not covered by the accessory 931 and enter the out port 36. Therefore, although the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901, it can be relatively easily grasped that the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b did not win. That is, for example, when the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is not in the open state (for example, the normal mode or the latent mode), Even if the game ball is made to enter, naturally, the gaming ball has no habit of entering the ball in any of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b. At this time, the front is covered with the front decoration plate 903 and the entrance part 931 until the game ball which has not entered the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is discharged out of the game area. It is difficult to visually recognize which of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b has won, or which one has not won.

  In this respect, with regard to the game ball which has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 but has not entered either of the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, the front decoration plate 903 or the entry role is again played. The second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are opened by moving to the game area outside the right-handed winning unit 901 which is not covered by the object 931. Otherwise, the corresponding winning ball (game ball (the game ball is It is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles due to misunderstanding that there is no payout) or the deterioration of interest.

  Further, according to the fifth embodiment, the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (the game area on the back side thereof) as the specific area until it enters the second start-up winning device 33b. A relatively long time lag occurs until the start winning switch 224b is detected (the second starting winning device 33b is disposed upstream of the second variable winning device 32, but it is a right-handed winning unit There is a slight distance from the entrance of 901, and there may be a longer time lag and the corresponding response may be felt slower compared to directly viewing the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Even in such a case, the gaming ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 is on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b (is the entrance site of the right-handed winning unit 901) Hold icon 962 to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the second start winning switch 224b is detected at the stage detected by the entry detection switch 941 disposed on the back side of the mouthpiece 931). Is configured to display a pseudo hold icon 963 imitating. That is, although the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901, there is no reaction to it, and the player is given an anxiety such as it makes any sense to enter the game ball into the right-handed winning unit 901. It is possible to prevent such a situation that the player is overturned, or a situation in which the player does not realize that he is actually entering the game ball into the second start winning switch 224b. Therefore, in the configuration having the right-handed winning unit 901 provided with the plurality of winning devices (the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b), it is possible to make progress of a more suitable game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the entry detection switch 941 is detected, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the high ball-in state, and only when it is determined that the ball is in the high ball-in state. Only when the game ball entering the winning unit 901 is detected by the second start winning switch 224b and there is a possibility that the hold icon 962 is derived, the pseudo hold icon 963 is derived based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941. Is configured as. Therefore, for example, the pseudo holding icon 963 is derived based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941 even in a state other than the high entering state (for example, the normal state of hitting the left) (the pseudo holding icon 963 is displayed) The situation that the variable display is not performed at once and the pseudo holding icon 963 itself is also erased can be avoided, causing confusion to the player or giving the player an unpleasant feeling, etc. Can be prevented more reliably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, detection of the discharge detection switch 943 for detecting the game ball discharged from the right-turn winning unit 901 or detection of the second count switch 223b is performed in a state where the pseudo storage icon 963 is displayed. If done, the pseudo retention icon 963 is configured to be erased (one). As a result, the gaming ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 in the high entering state and is detected by the entry detection switch 941 but is discharged from the right-handed winning unit 901 without entering the second start winning device 33b. If there is a possibility that the false hold icon 963 is switched to the hold icon 962 if there is a problem (for example, the high entry state ends at the timing immediately after the detection of the entry detection switch 941). Nevertheless, it is possible to avoid the situation where the pseudo hold icon 963 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the detection of the entry detection switch 941 is performed in the high entering state, the sound effect (entry effect sound B) corresponding to the entry to the second start winning device 33b is output. At the same time, the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed. In this manner, the player enters the game ball into the entry detection switch 941 in the high entry state, thereby corresponding to entering the second variable winning device 33b (into the second variable winning device 33b Since the reaction to be expected is derived, it is possible to further strengthen the (simulated) feeling that the game ball for the player is made to win in the second start-up winning device 33b and, consequently, the game is advanced. .

  In the present embodiment, when the detection of the entry detection switch 941 is performed and the entry state is high, the entry effect sound B is generated, and the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed, When the second variable winning device 32b is open jackpot jackpot state is generated, the entry sound effect A is generated, and in the other state, for example, when it is in a state to hit the left, the left strike Please be aware that announcements will be made. That is, shortly after the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901, if it is in a high entering state, the second starting winning device 33b is entered, and the second variable winning device 32b is opened. If it is, to grasp the second variable winning device 32b, even if not directly confirmed by visually recognizing the inside of the right-handed winning unit 901, to grasp the display mode in the sound effect and the decorative symbol display device 42 Can. Therefore, even if the player plays the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are united into one as the right-turn winning unit 901, the player does not feel uncomfortable. And, it is possible to play the game relatively smoothly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo hold icon 963 (in the above example, basically the floating ring) of the hold display area 961 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed, a mode different from the pseudo hold icon 963 A bubble display 964 as an additional display is displayed so as to overlap in front of the pseudo hold icon 963. Furthermore, when the pseudo hold icon 963 is switched to the hold icon 962, the bubble display 964 displayed corresponding to the pseudo hold icon 963 is erased.

  Thus, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 is not determined by deriving the bubble display 964 together with the pseudo hold icon 963 and making the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 a mode in which at least a part is not revealed. As a result, the pseudo hold icon 963 can be strongly given the impression that there is a possibility of further change (it becomes a hold icon 962). As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player confuses the false hold icon 963 with the hold icon 962, and a problem (for example, a problem that may occur due to misunderstanding the false hold icon 963 with the hold icon 963). Although the false hold icon 963 has been performed, the variable display process etc. that can be executed when the hold icon 962 is displayed by mistaken for the hold icon 962 may not be executed, or the lottery for invalidity is invalid. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the trouble that the player makes a game hall or the like a protest such as being turned off.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the first embodiment, from the upper position of the start winning hole 402 as a specific point, through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, the gaming ball is again brought to the upper position of the start winning hole 402 again. The rush route is configured to intersect at the upper position of the start winning opening 402 (corresponding to the left of the start winning shutter 405), but not to cross (do not pass through the same place again) You may In this case, the game ball jumping out of the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 collides with the game ball jumping out to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 again via the re-entry path 414, It is possible to more reliably avoid the situation where the start winning hole 402 is not won. For example, the game ball falls from the guide stand 407 to the left on the introduction path 412 side of the start winning shutter 405, and the game ball from the re-entry path 414 to the discharge opening 411 side of the start winning shutter 405 It may be configured to be derived to

  In the above embodiment, although the re-entry route crosses, since it is at the upper position of the start winning opening 402, both gaming balls hit each other even if the game balls collide at that position. It is likely to get into. Therefore, compared with the case where the re-entry route crosses at a position other than the upper position of the start winning opening 402, it is possible to suppress the situation where the game balls block the winning to the starting winning opening 402.

  (B) Further, in the first embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the top of the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the reentry path 414 are passed, and only the start winning opening 402 is performed again. The game ball may be configured to be able to access the upper position of the start winning opening 402 three times or more. For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the start winning hole 402 and the start winning shutter 405 are formed in a step-like shape. That is, the start-up winning shutter 405 includes a connecting plate 491 extending vertically, an upper closing plate 492 extending leftward from the upper side of the connecting plate 491, and a lower closing plate 493 extending rightward from the lower side of the connecting plate 491. It comprises so that it may provide and the starting winning a prize mouth 402 is also made into a corresponding shape.

  Furthermore, in addition to the re-entry path (first entry path 494) located on the back side of the start-up winning shutter 405, a re-entry path (second entry path 495) is formed on the front side of the start-up prize shutter 405. When the gaming ball is guided from the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the gaming ball falls on the upper blocking plate 492 of the starting winning shutter 405. And enter the first inrush passage 494 through the introduction passage 412. The gaming ball having passed through the first rush path 494 jumps out to a position above the start winning hole 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 492 of the start winning shutter 405. If the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position also at this timing, the gaming ball traverses the upper closing plate 492 forward and enters the second rush path 495. The gaming ball having passed through the second rush path 495 jumps out to a position above the start winning hole 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the lower closing plate 493 of the start winning shutter 405. When the start winning shutter 405 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins the start winning opening 402 and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the gaming ball is the upper surface of the lower closing plate 493. And is discharged from the discharge opening 411.

  In addition, since the second start winning device 33b according to this embodiment does not fit in the space between the game board 30 and the glass frame unit 137, the game board 30 is scraped and the introduction path 412 is disposed more rearward, In the table 407, the game balls are configured to be ejected obliquely backward.

  (C) In the first embodiment, at least one of the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 may be provided with propulsive force application means for applying a propulsive force to the game ball. For example, a roller in which the upper part is exposed from the lower surface of the introduction path 412 and a motor for rotating the roller may be provided. Also, for example, moving means such as a belt conveyor may be installed in the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414.

  In addition, in order to return the gaming ball which has passed through the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 in the closed position above the starting winning opening 402 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again, the introducing path 412 It is necessary to incline upward in the direction of separation, and the gaming ball runs up the introduction path 412.

  (D) A buffer for reducing the impact when the game ball is received against, for example, the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 of the first embodiment or the opening peripheral edge of the start winning opening 402 receiving the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 A material (rubber, relatively soft thermoplastic elastomer, etc.) may be installed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage or collision noise. The buffer material can also be applied to the special winning shutter 434 of the second embodiment and the start winning shutter 405 of the third embodiment.

  (E) In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is embodied by moving the game ball to the winning opening immediately for a predetermined time while being able to win, but the second variable winning device 32b It is also possible to apply such a structure to the starting ball entry means used for the predetermined lottery of the second starting winning device 33b etc. In this case, more game balls can be focused on the starting ball entry means in a short-term intensive manner without increasing the opening time, and the winning balls awarded when entering the ball entry means are reduced Even if the number of balls entering the starting ball entering means increases (the ball entering ratio to the total number of shots increases), it is possible to prevent or suppress that the speed of decreasing the holding balls becomes too fast. Furthermore, the increase in the number of balls entering the starting ball entry means increases the chances of lottery and can increase the number of lotterys and can improve the interest by increasing the chance of presentation. In addition, it can also create new playability.

  (F) In the second embodiment, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is configured to slide back and forth, but the present invention is not particularly limited to this configuration, and sliding up and down It may be configured to open and close the big winning opening that opens in the front and back, or may be configured to be rotatable. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state is mounted on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 and near the right end that is one longitudinal end side of the big winning shutter 434 Although it is configured to move from the part to the left end that is the other end side in the longitudinal direction, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the big winning opening is immediately when the big winning shutter 434 is opened. It is sufficient if the gaming ball can be moved as long as possible in a state where it can enter 432.

  For example, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured as shown in FIG. That is, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in FIG. 58 is a closed position extending vertically and closing the big winning opening 432, and an open position extending longitudinally back and opening the big winning opening 432. And is configured to be pivotable about an axial direction extending leftward and rightward along the upper edge when in the closed position. In addition, the game receiving member 801 is provided to receive the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. The receiving member 801 includes a receiving plate 802 extending forward from the lower edge of the large winning opening 432 and a front plate 803 extending upward from the front edge of the receiving plate 802, and integrally formed of a transparent resin material. ing.

  At least the upper surface (receiving surface) of the receiving plate 802 is slightly inclined downward to the left, and further inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the gaming ball received by the receiving member 801 is moved leftward on the receiving member 801 while maintaining a state in which the gaming ball is in contact with the rear big winning shutter 434. Then, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the game ball leaning on the big winning shutter 434 while moving the receiving member 801 tilts backward since the big winning shutter 434 is not supported. It will be guided to the backing plate 802 and will enter the large winning opening 432 on the back side. It should be noted that although the gaming ball is received by the receiving member 801, if the big winning shutter 434 is not opened before the gaming ball reaches the left end of the receiving member 801, it is discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device 32b. Ru.

  As described above, even when the second variable winning device 32b is configured, the second winning device can be immediately opened if the second variable winning device 32b is in an open state, such as the game ball leaning against the large winning opening shutter 434. The game ball can be moved along the longitudinal direction of the big winning opening shutter 434 while entering the ball, so that the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b can be increased. Basically, the same effect is exhibited.

  (G) In the second embodiment, the game ball on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is moved from the vicinity of one end in the left-right direction which is the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434 toward the other end. Thus, the time for which the big winning shutter 434 is placed is made as long as possible, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the gaming ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is The upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 may be configured to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434.

  For example, in the second variable winning device 32b shown in FIG. 56, by appropriately forming a plurality of convex portions on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, an entering opportunity to meander the gaming ball moving on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434. A guide groove 811 as an application means is provided. In the present embodiment, the gaming ball entering the second variable winning device 32 b is the top of the guiding groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 by a game member such as a game nail arranged upstream of the second variable winning device 32 b. It is configured to be guided to the right end vicinity portion 812 (which is wider than the other portions) which is the upstream position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), of the mounting plate 431 for attaching the second variable winning device 32 b to the game board 30, a portion above the housing opening 408 where the big winning shutter 434 appears and retracts (hereinafter, The front surface of the upper base portion 813 is inclined rearward and upward. The lower end portion (upper edge portion of the accommodation opening 408) of the upper base portion 813 is positioned below the central portion of the game ball moving on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and The upper base portion 813 is in contact with a portion lower than the center of the game ball when the game ball moving backward moves backward. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the gaming ball on the big winning shutter 434 is caught on the step that defines the front edge of the guide groove 811. Even if it moves backward and is pressed to the upper base portion 813 side, the gaming ball is guided by the front surface of the upper base portion 813 and displaced upward while relative to the step defining the front edge portion of the guide groove 811 In order to enter the special winning opening 432.

  As described above, the guide groove 811 meandering on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is formed, and while the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 meanders, the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434 is By moving the long distance, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state where the gaming ball can enter the big winning opening 432 for a longer time. Therefore, during a period in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened a plurality of times, the game ball is reached at such a timing that the second variable winning device 32b is reached when the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed state. Even if the game is hit, the gaming ball moves as far as it can enter the second variable winning device 32b as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, but stays within the range as much as possible. It is possible to wait for the second variable winning device 32b to be opened next time. As a result, the operation and effect of the second embodiment, such as increasing the possibility of entering the ball into the second variable winning device 32b, can be more reliably exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is meandered in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter 434 long in the left and right of the big winning shutter 434 A distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the winning combination shutter 434 is moved toward the longitudinal direction downstream side. Generally, the width before and after the gaming area defined by the gaming board 30 and the transparent glass unit 137 disposed in front thereof is smaller than twice the diameter (about 11 mm) of the gaming ball. Therefore, while meandering the gaming ball on the top surface of the big winning shutter in a direction intersecting the short direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter, or the center side of the substantially circular big winning shutter If you try to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter while turning from the to the outer circumference side, it is necessary to make the front and rear width of the big winning shutter wider than the front and rear width of the game area, There is a possibility that it is obliged to select a point behind the front of the game board 30 as a suitable starting point of the game ball moving on the big winning shutter. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this respect, if the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is only meandered in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter 434, the front and rear width of the big winning shutter 434 is Even if it is not wider than the front and rear width of the game area, the gaming ball on the big winning shutter 434 can be moved a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Further, for example, instead of forming the concavo-convex on the big winning shutter 434, form a protrusion protruding inward from the peripheral edge of the big winning opening 432 above the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position. It may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is guided by the protrusion and moved while meandering, in which case the big winning shutter Even if the 434 is displaced to the open position, the projection remains in the state of being projected to the inner peripheral side from the opening peripheral portion of the large winning opening 432. For this reason, there is a risk that the ease of entering the game ball into the big winning opening 432 may be reduced, so by forming the guide groove 811 directly on the big winning shutter 434 as in the example of the above embodiment, If the special winning shutter 434 is displaced to the open position, the whole of the guide groove 811 naturally exits the game area, so that such a problem can be eliminated.

  Furthermore, the front surface of the upper base portion 813 of the mounting plate 431 that may come into contact with the game ball resting on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is inclined rearward and upward, and the big winning shutter The upper base portion 813 is held on the upper base portion 813 even if the game ball placed on the 434 is caught on the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 moving to the open position to the rear. It can be displaced upward as it rides on, and can smoothly ride over the winning combination shutter 434 (step of the guide groove 811) relatively smoothly. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the big winning shutter 434 rests between the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 and the upper base portion 813. It is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball is pressed and pressed in such a way as to be pinched, and the game ball is flung out due to the force. Therefore, the game ball on the big prize shutter 434 can be made to enter the big prize hole 432 more reliably when the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position, and damage to the second variable prize device 32b etc. It can be suppressed.

  Incidentally, as a modification of the configuration to move the predetermined distance in a state where it can enter the big winning opening 432 immediately as long as the big winning shutter 434 opens, for example, as shown in FIG. A small protrusion 805 may be provided on the top surface of the plate 802 as a means for giving a chance to enter the ball. By the presence of the small projections 805, the moving speed of the gaming ball moving the receiving member 801 is suppressed. Therefore, as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the gaming ball is allowed to stay as long as possible at a position where it can enter the big winning opening 432 as much as possible, and the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b It is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Furthermore, for example, the upper surface of the big winning shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape having a low center and high left and right, and the gaming ball placed on the big winning shutter reciprocates to the left and right, and the momentum is weakened It may be configured to fall. In the case of adopting the configuration (a configuration in which the game ball is reciprocated to the left and right on the big winning shutter corresponds to the ball entering opportunity giving means), the game ball rolling on the big winning shutter is greatly prized A hole or a hole is formed in the game board 30 so that the game ball can be second-changed before and after the big winning shutter, since it must not be discharged from the shutter forward or backward and discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device It is necessary to form a passage for discharging to the outside of the winning device.

  In addition, for example, a big winning shutter that can be displaced between a closed position closing the big winning opening 432 opening forward and an open position shifting downward from below the closed position and opening the big winning opening 432. 434, displacement between an appearance position which appears upward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 of the receiving member 801 to form the guide groove 811 on the receiving plate 802, and an embedded position which retreats downward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 A possible guiding member may be provided, and the guiding member may be interlocked in such a manner that the guiding member is also in the immersive position when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position.

  (H) Also, in the second embodiment, the shape of the winning combination shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited. For example, while having a rotary shaft extending left and right and a plurality of blade type opening and closing plates extending in the centrifugal direction from the rotating shaft, the large winning opening is closed with the blade type opening and closing plate, and the rotary shaft rotates to put the game ball on The game ball mounted thereon may be configured to win a prize winning opening 432 by the downward movement of the wing type opening and closing plate.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second variable winning device 32 b is in the open position, all of the gaming balls placed on the big winning shutter 434 enter the big winning opening 432. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and at least the possibility of ball entry may be increased. For example, the big winning shutter 434 may be extended to the upper right by protruding from the big winning opening 432 upstream. Further, instead of extending the big winning shutter 434, a start stand such as the reception stand 479 of the fourth embodiment as the rectifying means is provided adjacent to the upper end of the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position. The game ball may be guided to the side of the large winning opening 432 after the game ball is passed (falled) to the start stand. In this case, it is possible to suppress variations in the speed, angle, and the like of the gaming ball entering the big winning opening 432 side, and it is possible to further suppress damage to the big winning shutter 434. The starting stand may be configured to be more resistant to shock than the big winning shutter 434 (provided with means for relieving shock or high in its own strength), or may be configured to be removable. It may be possible.

  (I) Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured. That is, the special winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b shown in FIG. 57 displaces back and forth between the closed position closing the large winning opening 432 opened upward and the open position opening the large winning opening 432. It is juxtaposed with a possible first shutter 821 and a distance above the diameter of the gaming ball from the first shutter 821 above the first shutter 821 and is located above the special winning opening 432 with the first shutter 821 therebetween. A second shutter 822 is displaceable back and forth between a closed position and an open position exiting from above the large winning opening 432. The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are simultaneously configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position, and in the present embodiment, both are integrally formed.

  The second shutter 822 is slightly inclined downward to the left. Further, the first shutter 821 is slightly inclined downward to the right. Furthermore, the first shutter 821 is wider than the second shutter 822, and the left end is positioned more to the left than the diameter of the gaming ball than the left end of the second shutter 822, and A stopper 823 is formed to project upward from the left end. Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball entering the second variable winning device 32b is located on the upstream side of the second shutter 822 by a game member such as a game nail disposed upstream of the second variable winning device 32b. It is comprised so that it may be guided to the site | part near the right end which is a position.

  The gaming ball dropped to the second shutter 822 in the closed position moves leftward on the second shutter 822 and falls from the left end, but the gaming ball is in the closed position. It lands in the vicinity of the left end portion of the one shutter 821, and then moves to the right above the first shutter 821. In addition, when the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the closed position are displaced to the open position, almost all the game balls placed on the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are in the winning opening 432. It will hit the ball. The game ball having moved on the first shutter 821 to the right end of the first shutter 821 is discharged from the second variable winning device 32b to the outside.

  When adopting the configuration as described above, the position and speed of the gaming ball falling (entering) into the first shutter 821 can be limited to a certain extent by the second shutter 822, and the movement of the gaming ball on the first shutter 821 It can be suitable. The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 move to the open position not only for the game balls on the first shutter 821 in the closed position but also for the game balls on the second shutter 822 in the closed position. By entering the large winning opening 432, the same effect as that of the second embodiment, in which the game ball is made to enter the large winning opening 432 efficiently, is more reliably exhibited. .

  In the above embodiment, the game nail may be installed at a position directly below the second shutter 822. However, when the second shutter 822 in the closed position is in the open position, the game ball placed on the second shutter 822 can enter the special winning opening 432 when the game nail is in the closed position. In addition, it is arranged so as not to impede the movement of the game ball moving on the first shutter 821 in the closed position. When adopting such a configuration, with the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the open position, there is no contact with a game member such as a game nail from the upper position than the second shutter 822. When the game ball jumps directly from a relatively high position with respect to the special winning opening 432, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the impact when receiving the game ball becomes relatively large. In addition, the game nail may be configured to support the lower surface of the second shutter 822.

  (J) In the second embodiment, the gaming ball is guided (falling) from the upper left position toward the lower right from the upper left position on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 inclined to the lower left by the game nail or character or the like. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the gaming ball is dropped in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and the (first) speed of the gaming ball moving on the big winning shutter 434 can be made as slow as possible.

  (K) In the third embodiment, the installation position of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) is not particularly limited, and there is no fundamental problem if it is on the upstream side of the start winning opening 402. However, if the distance between the switching plate 451 and the start winning opening 402 changes, the timing of switching between the open state and the closed state of the switching plate 451 also changes, of course. For example, it is necessary to make a corresponding design based on simulation and the like.

  (L) In the third embodiment, synchronization means may be provided to synchronize the opening / closing timing of the start winning shutter 405 with the operation timing of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459). The synchronization means may be, for example, an interlock mechanism that interlocks mechanically, or may be control means that opens and operates with the same opening / operating timing and opening / operating conditions. The control unit may be a control unit that measures the opening timing of the start winning shutter 405 and adjusts the timing.

  (M) It is also possible to appropriately combine and use the second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b of the second embodiment, and the second start winning device 33b of the third embodiment. It is possible.

  (O) In the fourth embodiment, the shape of the second start winning device 33b is not particularly limited. For example, the first start winning opening 472 is disposed on the upper left of the second start winning opening 473, The game ball may be configured to flow from left to right. In addition, the communication path 477 may be configured to, for example, flow down while rotating the gaming ball.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 are present in the second start winning device 33b, but for example, one start winning opening with wide entrance in the left and right There is one start winning switch 224b for detecting ball entry, and the game ball is configured to be enterable at the right end and the left end of the entrance, the middle position is closed by the communication passage 477, and the ball is enterable. Each unit may be configured to be openable and closable by a shutter. The number of starting winning openings provided in the second starting winning device 33b may be three or more.

  (P) In the fourth embodiment, the benefit is the same regardless of which of the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 of the second starting winning device 33b enters the game ball But may be configured differently. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, even if the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, it is discharged from the second start winning device 33b without winning in any of the start winning openings 472 and 473. If there is a possibility that the second start winning opening 473, which has a possibility of winning at a later timing, will win more than the first starting winning opening 472. You may comprise so that it may be provided. As a benefit, for example, there are a large number of gaming balls paid out based on the detection of the start winning switch 224b, detection of the start winning switch 224b, which has a high probability of winning in the lottery based on the detection of the start winning switch 224b Distribution of jackpot type at the time of winning in the success or failure lottery performed on the basis of the game is advantageous to the player, there are a plurality of start winning switch 224b to detect the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 472 (variation display of special symbol There is a plurality of start-up winning switches 224b and a through gate switch 225 for detecting gaming balls that have won in the second start-up winning opening 472 (a plurality of variable symbols of special symbols and ordinary symbols are suspended). Etc.). The game ball can only reach the second start winning hole 473 when the first start winning hole 472 is closed by the first shutter 474, and the game ball passes the first shutter 474, Since the second shutter 475 is not opened before passing the second shutter 475, it is not possible to enter the ball, so a benefit is awarded based on entering the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. In the case of making the game different, the player who is given the benefit based on entering the second starting winning opening 473 (in terms of difficulty in entering the ball or simply in terms of the fun of appearance) is the player It is desirable to be more advantageous to

  Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, it always wins in any of the start winning openings having a plurality of game balls (or when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b during a predetermined period) If the game ball is configured to always win in any of the start-up winning openings that have a plurality of game balls, the game balls may be able to win at a later timing than the start-up winning openings that have a possibility of winning at later timings. You may be comprised so that the more generous prize may be provided to the prize winning to the start winning prize mouth which has sex. In addition, when there are three or more start winning openings of the second start winning device 33b, it is possible to increase (more) the benefit of winning to the start winning opening at the middle point. In addition, the start winning opening with the larger (more) winning prize is positioned on the front side (in a prominent position) closer to the player than the smaller (lower) starting winning opening. Is desirable.

  The configuration of the second startup winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment may be embodied as another target, for example, the second variable winning device 32b. That is, in this case, there are a plurality of large winning openings of the second variable winning device 32b, the shutter for opening and closing each large winning opening, the communication passage connecting the large winning openings, etc. The game balls for which the winning a prize is rejected are to be sequentially guided to the downstream big winning opening. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the game ball is guided to another winning opening when entering a predetermined winning opening as in the fourth embodiment does not match the configuration of the starting winning device, Alternatively or additionally, it is possible to apply to a variable winning device.

  (Q) In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a speed reduction means for delaying the passing speed of the gaming ball passing through the communication passage 477 may be provided. For example, install a windmill to push the blade away with the game ball and rotate it, or a roller that rotates in the direction to send the game ball to the opposite side to the passing direction of the game ball (for example, send the game ball to the opposite side There is no phase, and the gaming ball entering the communication path 477 may be moved to the downstream side to reach the upper position of the second start winning opening 473).

  (R) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning device 32a of various jackpot types, the second variable winning device 32b, etc. are not particularly limited. It can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the winning probability in the success or failure lottery changes, the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high entering state to be granted after the end of the jackpot state The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lottery for winning when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the lottery for winning when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b are separately performed. The table of is referred to, and the distribution of the jackpot type is configured to change, but may be the same.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, two start winning devices 33a and 33b are provided, in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the detection of the entering game ball, and the variable winning is opened in the big hit state or the small hit state. Although two devices 32a and 32b are provided, and one through gate 34 is provided on which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the detection of the passing game ball, the number, the arrangement, etc. of these are particularly limited. It is not something but can be set for each model.

  (S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is suspended after the variation display (first variation display) based on the entry of the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a which is already suspended. The second variable display is given priority so that the variable display (the second variable display) based on the entry of the game ball is taken earlier than the first variable display in such a manner that the held order is repeated. Although it is comprised so that it may be digested, it may be comprised so that it may be digested according to the held order irrespective of it being a 1st fluctuation | variation display or a 2nd fluctuation | variation display.

  (T) In the above embodiment, after the main processing (see FIG. 9) is performed by the main control unit 261, the normal processing (see FIG. 10) is performed, but the present invention is particularly limited to such a configuration is not. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal processing in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec. The process performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. As the process of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and the power failure is confirmed when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed. There is a configuration that turns on a flag indicating the occurrence of Further, the processing of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt processing as in the above embodiment.

  (U) In the above embodiment, the information as to whether or not the big hit state occurs in the pass / fail random number storage area for storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is overwritten. It is not limited to For example, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs separately from the execution area of the special variation reserve area and each reserve area for the winning random number storage area, or the special variation reserve Aside from the area, a storage area corresponding to an execution area of each special variation reserve area and each reserve area may be provided, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the type of big hit may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 Alternatively, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is confirmed again whether the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, etc., and processing according to the confirmation processing is performed You may configure it.

  (V) A pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment may be implemented. For example, movable means that can be changed to a specific area where game balls moving in the game area can enter the ball, an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the ball to enter the specific area ( A variable ball entry means having a wing member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and a game ball entering a specific ball entry means Special entering detection means (condition satisfaction detecting means) to be detected, a special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving the game area, and detecting the game ball entering the special starting means Special start detection means and main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is specified ball entering means and non-specific ball entering means A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the The main control means is a small hitting state in which the variable ball entering means is opened one or more times for a first time based on the detection of the special start detecting means, or the variable ball entering means is the first time Whether or not to generate a jackpot state which repeats this a specified number of times, with a predetermined number of game balls entering the open variable winning means, for a second round, until the second time is opened for a longer period of time If you win a small hit in the win lottery, will generate a small hit state, if you win a big hit in the win lottery, and if there is a detection of the specific entering detection means The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state. In addition to pachinko machines, the game is implemented as an arrange ball machine, various types of game machines such as ball ball similar to it, slot machines as rotating game machines, and gaming machines of a type combining slot machines and pachinko machines. You may

  (W) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited, and design changes can be made as appropriate. For example, as in the second start winning device 33b (see FIG. 38 etc.) of the first embodiment, the gaming ball may be configured to be able to pass the same position above the start winning opening 911 twice. Also, for example, as in the second variable winning device 32b (see FIG. 40 etc.) of the second embodiment, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b during the interval of the jackpot state is large during the interval It may be configured to keep moving on the winning shutter 434. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 44, according to the situation, a mechanism capable of delaying the arrival of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b may be provided on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b. It is also good. However, as in the fifth embodiment, in the case where the game ball can not enter the second variable winning device 32b without passing through the second start winning device 33b, as shown in FIG. It is desirable that the flow of the game ball itself is not stopped because there is a concern that the game itself may be stuck if the ball is stopped. The first start winning device 33a (or one having an opening / closing member attached thereto; see the second start winning device 33b in FIG. 41) or the first variable winning device 32a may have a general configuration.

  Further, for example, as the second variable winning device 32b, a first passage for guiding a gaming ball entering the large winning opening 921 to a count switch where payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is performed based on detection of the gaming balls , The second passage which guides the game ball entered in the big winning opening 921 to the V prize detection switch to which the right of continuation of the probability change mode or the continuation of the big hit round is granted based on the detection of the game ball, A device (so-called V-attacker) may be employed, which includes a distribution means for distributing the game ball having entered the winning opening 921 to either the first passage or the second passage. Furthermore, the jackpot state is not limited to a configuration in which only one of the first variable prize device 32a and the second variable prize device 32b is opened between the start and the end of the jackpot state. The first variable winning device 32a may be opened in a predetermined round, and the second variable winning device 32b may be opened in another round. When the configuration is adopted, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized, and the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b of the fifth embodiment. As related, a game ball that did not enter one of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b may be configured to be guided to the other. In this case, the player may hit the game ball aiming at the unit in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are united if the jackpot state occurs, the first variable winning device 32a and It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to know which one of the second variable winning device 32b should be hit and hit.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the game balls that have arrived at the entry point of the second startup winning device 33b but have not entered the second startup winning device 33b are guided to the second variable winning device 32b. Although configured, for example, on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b and the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 to the second start winning device 33b A branch may be located between the starting side passage to be reached and the variable side passage for bringing the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 to the second variable winning device 32b. When the configuration is adopted, distribution means may be provided at the branch point.

  The winning means unitized by the right-handed winning unit 901 is not particularly limited. For example, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b may be unitized or the first start The winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b may be unitized. Furthermore, the installation position of a unit in which a plurality of winning units are united as in the right-handed winning unit 901 is not particularly limited. For example, both right-handed gaming balls and left-handed gaming balls can be entered. It is good also as providing in the position which can be sphered.

  In the above embodiment, the game ball detected by the second start winning switch 224b and the second count switch 223b is always detected by the entry detection switch 941 before that and the game detected by the entry detection switch 941 The ball is configured to be guided to a position where it can enter the second starting winning device 33b if the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, but the present invention is not particularly limited to this configuration. For example, a route leading to the second start winning device 33b may exist without passing through the entry detection switch 941 or after passing through the entry detection switch 941 to the second start winning device 33b. In the open state, a passage may be configured to be discharged to the outside of the right-handed winning unit 901 without passing through the point at which the ball can enter. However, when it is desired to grasp the remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901, all the game balls entering the right-handed winning unit 901 are detected by the entry detection switch 941 and the entry detection switch 941 is hit as much as possible right It is desirable to arrange near the entrance of unit 901.

  (X) In the fifth embodiment, the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized, and the gaming ball passed through the ball entry point of the second starting winning device 33b is the second variable winning device Although it is configured to move to the ball entry point 32b, there is no particular limitation on the target of the unitized winning device, the relative positional relationship between the winning devices such as the upstream side and the downstream side, and the like.

  For example, in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is disposed upstream of the second variable winning device 32b, but the second start winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the second variable winning device 32b. You may do it. In this case, since the game ball does not substantially enter the second start winning device 33b in the jackpot presence jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the second start winning device 33b is entered. The payout of the game ball based on the ball is virtually eliminated. Therefore, the jackpot state can be progressed more quickly, and (when two or more prize balls are based on the prize winning on the second variable prize device 32b, or during a jackpot present jackpot state, the right hitting prize unit 901 If there is a possibility that the game ball will not enter either of the second variable winning device 32b and the second start winning device 33b even if the game ball enters the game ball) in the second start winning device 33b in the jackpot state It is possible to avoid relatively large changes in the total number of game balls paid out during the jackpot state depending on whether or not the player enters the ball. As a result, it is possible to make the total number of game balls paid out in the same type of jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state substantially constant, and to facilitate the design regarding the game ball payout (payout rate) Can. In addition, it is possible to derive the jackpot state with little variation in the number of payouts of the game balls as the gaming concept (feature of the predetermined jackpot state).

  In the present embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the arrangements of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are reversed, but a method which fits the concept of each model is adopted. Just do it. That is, for example, in "a configuration in which there is a payout of one gaming ball based on the entering of the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b", no increase in gaming balls can be expected at this, and the second variable winning device In the jackpot state in which 32b is in the open state, the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is regarded as a waste of time, and the second variable winning device 32b is disposed upstream as in this embodiment. It may be or, without increasing the payout rate of the game ball, the time required to squeeze the jackpot state (the time when the presentation for the jackpot state can be derived) can be made as long as possible, and the jackpot state itself will be enjoyed more As in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b may be disposed upstream as in the fifth embodiment.

  Also, for example, the through gate 34 may be configured to be included in the right-handed winning unit 901. Furthermore, the through gate 34 is disposed on the upstream side (rear of the entrance part 931) of the second start winning device 33b of the fifth embodiment, and the gaming ball which has passed the through gate 34 is (almost certainly) second starting A ball guiding means for guiding to the winning device 33b may be provided, and in the case of the time saving mode or the probability variation mode, the gaming ball having passed the through gate 34 may directly enter the second starting winning device 33b. The arrangement of the through gate 34 is not particularly limited. However, if the through gate 34 is disposed downstream of the second start winning device 33 b, the gaming ball having passed through the through gate 34 is as it is. (2) Since there is no possibility of entering the starting winning device 33b, it is desirable that the through gate 34 be disposed upstream of the second starting winning device 33b in order to suppress a wasted ball.

  (Y) In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed gaming ball is always configured to enter (enter) the right-handed winning unit 901. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. From the out-port 36 without passing through the right-handed winning unit 901 (without passing through the game area covered with the front decoration plate 903 of the right-handed winning unit 901 and the entrance character 931) You may comprise so that it may be discharged | emitted out of a game area. Also, in the case of adopting such a configuration, an assist winning device (general winning device) is provided in which the right-handed gaming ball can enter and the two or more winning balls are awarded based on the entering of the gaming ball. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of game balls held by the player is reduced in the high ball entry state in which the player strikes a right.

  Furthermore, the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 may be configured not to reach the starting shutter 912 (upper connecting plate 912b) of the second starting winning device 33b on the upstream side. The game ball entering the winning unit 901 and passing through the upper surface of the starting shutter 912 of the upstream second starting winning device 33b reaches the big winning shutter 922 (upper connecting plate 922b) of the downstream second variable winning device 32b You may configure so that it may not do. In addition, when adopting the configuration, a first unreached detection switch that detects gaming balls discharged to the outside of the right-turn winning unit 901 without reaching the start shutter 912 after being detected by the entry detection switch 941 Or, after passing through the upper surface of the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b, the second unreached detection switch that detects the game ball discharged to the outside of the right-handed winning unit 901 without reaching the lower large winning shutter 922 It is good also as providing (of course, it is not necessary to provide).

  In addition, with regard to whether or not the game ball reaches the entry point to the start winning hole 911 and the entry point to the big winning hole 921 after the game ball enters the right-turn winning unit 901, the installation of the right-turn winning unit 901 A change may be made to occur depending on the arrangement of the game nails provided in the area. Furthermore, among the gaming balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the time reduction mode and the definite variation mode (the first entering possible state), calculate the ratio of the gaming balls that did not enter the start winning opening 911 Of the game balls that entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the jackpot state (second ball entry possible state) with balls, calculate the ratio of the game balls that did not enter the big winning hole 921 or (1) The number of detections of the non-arriving detection switch or the second non-arriving detection switch may be counted or the like. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 can obtain information on the status of the game nails and the like provided in the installation area of the right-handed winning unit 901. For example, based on such information (Instruct the player to suggest and teach information according to the attitude of the entrance character 931), or include such information in the QR code (registered trademark) displayed at the end of the mobile interlocking game It may be configured to be sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal. As for the game nail provided in the installation area of the right-turn winning unit 901, the game nail exposed from the nail exposure hole 948 is interposed with an iron rod or the like through which the tip can be inserted through the exposure hole 948. It can be adjusted by tapping with a hammer.

  (Z) In the fifth embodiment, the front decoration plate 903 as the front decoration portion and the entrance part 931 form a part of the right-turn winning unit 901 (the second start winning device 33 b and the second starting winning device 33 b While the front wall of the variable winning device 32b is configured, the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, the guide plate 919, etc. are provided so as to cover the front) Is not particularly limited. For example, it may be provided so as to cover the front of another winning device, or may be provided in a portion of the gaming area that does not overlap with a gaming member such as a winning device.

  Further, although not particularly mentioned in the fifth embodiment, the design of the front decorative plate 903 and the entry part 931 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed for each model. However, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the back side of the part of the front decoration plate 903 and the entrance character 931, at least for the part where the game ball can pass through the game area on the back side. It is configured to be made of a translucent material or to form a slit) (on the part of the front decoration plate 903 and the entrance character 931 where the game ball can not pass the back side) May have no transparency). For example, the front decoration plate 903 is attached with information represented by symbol information such as characters and numbers (model name, model information such as probability of winning lottery, origin of copy right, etc.) ), Or it may have information (decoration, background, etc.) represented by, for example, processing an unevenness, drawing a pattern, or coloring it. In addition, such information is provided on the front side or inside of the front decoration plate 903 so that information is cut even if a game ball moving in the game area comes in contact with the front decoration plate 903 It can suppress the situation that it becomes difficult to see.

  Here, another example of the entrance character 931 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. FIG. The entrance combination 931 of the right-handed winning unit 901 shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 is integrally formed with the front decoration plate 903 and disposed on the rear surface side of the semi-transparent substantially disk-shaped fixed part 971 and the fixed part 971. And a semi-transparent, substantially disk-shaped rotating part 972. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, a motor 973 for rotating the rotating part 972 and a link mechanism 974 (a rotating shaft, a gear, etc.) for transmitting the driving force of the motor 973 to the rotating part 972 are provided.

  The fixing part 971 is formed with a substantially V-shaped cutout 971a so as to open upward. Further, a notch portion 972 a is formed in a substantially V-shape also in the rotating part 972. In the present embodiment, the diameter of the fixed part 971 and the diameter of the rotating part 972 are the same. Further, the formation range (about 120 degrees) of the notch 972a of the rotary part 972 is wider than the formation range (about 105 degrees) of the notch 971a of the fixed part 971.

  Further, in the entrance part 931 of this embodiment, as the rotating part 972 is appropriately rotated and displaced, the whole of the notch 971a of the fixed part 971 as shown in FIG. 70 (a) is closed by the rotating part 972 In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), although the rotary part 972 is visible inside the notch 971a of the fixed part 971, about half of the notch 971a is open (about half And the rotary part 972 is not partially visible inside the notch 971a of the fixed part 971, as shown in FIG. 70 (c). The entire portion 971a is configured to change to an open state.

  Then, in the time reduction mode and the positive change mode (first ball entry possible state), the entry combination 931 is in the small open state shown in FIG. 70 (b), and in the jackpot state with second balls (second ball entry possible state) The object 931 is in the large open state of FIG. 70 (c), and in the other state, the inlet port 931 is in the closed state of FIG. 70 (a). Thereby, if the entrance character 931 (the size of the opening) is visually recognized, which of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b the gaming ball can enter or is not Also, it is possible to grasp whether it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

  Further, the fixed part 971 is formed with a curved elongated hole 975. On the other hand, in the rotating part 972, a small opening display area 976 which is exposed to the front through the observation hole 975 when the entrance character 931 is in the small opening state, and the characters "chance" are written; A large opening display area 977 is provided which is exposed to the front through the observation hole 975 when the entry part 931 is in the large opening state, and the character of "big hit" is described. That is, by visually recognizing the display areas 976 and 977, it is possible to enter either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or neither It is possible to grasp whether it is possible or difficult.

  Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, although the entrance combination thing 931 was provided rotatably, you may perform another movement method and you may comprise so that it may not operate | move. For example, when a big hit or a small hit, or when performing a fake effect, the effect of rotating the entrance prize 931 is derived, the second variable winning device 32b is opened state occurrence of the jackpot jackpot state occurs In the case where the entry character 931 is stopped at the winning corresponding position, the entry character 931 is stopped at the high entry corresponding position in the case of a definite change big hit without a ball, otherwise the entrance character 931 is It may be configured to be stopped at the normal position. Furthermore, for example, the entrance character 931 does not operate, but the entrance character 931 is provided with light emitting means such as a three-color LED or the like that changes the light emission mode according to the state. It may be configured to perform state teaching according to

  Also, for example, the inlet character 931 may be configured to mechanically interlock with the start solenoid 913 that operates the start shutter 912 and the big winning solenoid 923 that operates the big winning shutter 922. In this case, the displacement control of the inlet character 931 can be simplified. In addition, it is desirable to provide a mark that makes the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901 intelligible, and furthermore, in the right-handed winning unit 901, any of the high entering state, the out-balls present jackpot state, and any other states. It is desirable to have means for teaching if it is a state. Further, even in the case where the front decoration plate 903 and the entry part 931 are provided, it is preferable that only the same game nail be erected on the game board 30. In this case, it is possible to unify the game nails, to improve the productivity of the pachinko machine 10, to reduce the cost, and the like.

  (Aa) Further, the positions and the number of the tool holes 947, the nail exposing holes 948, the ball clogging eliminating holes 949 and the like are not particularly limited. For example, the jam clearance hole 949 is arranged along the upper surfaces of the upper closing plate 912b and the lower closing plate 912c of the starting shutter 912 and the upper surfaces of the upper closing plates 922b and 922c of the big winning shutter 922 (in parallel). It may be formed (may be formed continuously in a line shape, or may be formed intermittently in a dot shape). Further, the ball clogging eliminating hole 949 is formed in a portion including the front surface of the introduction path 915a and the re-entry path 915b of the bypass member 915 and the front surface of the introduction path 925 a and the re-entry path 925 b of the bypass member 925. It is also good. By adopting these configurations, the function and effect of eliminating clogging of the ball in the rear side area of the right-handed winning unit 901 can be more reliably achieved. In addition, the clogging prevention hole 949 may be formed so as not to cover the entry detection switch 941 and the discharge detection switch 943 for the purpose of crime prevention.

  (Bb) In the fifth embodiment, in the jackpot presence jackpot state, the number of winning prizes to the second variable prize player 32b or the remaining number of prizes up to the upper limit in each jackpot round is detected by the decorative symbol display unit 42 The counter display may be configured to be displayed as a count, and the count display may be updated based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941 as the first detection unit. For example, the remaining number up to the winning upper limit of the game ball to the second variable winning device 32b in each big hit round of jackpot with jackpot status is counted and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, as a count display At the start of the round, "8" is displayed in "red", and the value obtained by subtracting 1 based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941 during the out-ball presence jackpot state ("7" if it was "8") Is displayed as "yellow", and based on the detection of the second count switch 223b, the value of the display is not changed, and the color is changed to "red".

  In addition, when the color of the count display is "yellow", when detection of the second start winning switch 224b or the discharge detection switch 943 is performed, the count display is returned to the value obtained by adding one, and "red" Change to It is to be noted that since the second start winning device 33b is opened even when the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state and the ball is in the open state and the jackpot support lottery is performed, the gaming ball is After being detected by the entry detection switch 941, there is a good possibility that the second starting winning device 33 b may enter the ball before reaching the second variable winning device 32 b. Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b corresponds to the display object detection means, the "red" count display corresponds to the ball entry detection correspondence display, and the "yellow" count display corresponds to the first entry ball detection correspondence display It corresponds to

  By adopting the configuration as described above, the time lag from the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 to the detection by the second start winning switch 224b becomes too long in the jack-out presence big hit state And the tempo after the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 is slow (the entry sound effect A corresponding to entering the second start winning device 33b has occurred, but the count display is not accompanied, etc.) It is possible to suppress such situations as giving an unnatural feeling of incongruity, or feeling uneasy about whether or not the position to aim at the game ball is here. In addition, it is possible to give a feeling that the player has made the second variable winning device 32b enter the game ball.

  In addition, when detection of the second start winning switch 224b or the discharge detection switch 943 is performed in a state where "yellow count display" is derived, the count display is returned to the value obtained by adding one, and By changing it to “red”, it is possible to relatively quickly inform the player of the correct remaining number up to the upper limit of entering the second variable winning device 32b of the gaming ball that triggers the end of the big hit round. In other words, if it remains "yellow count 0", even though it is possible to cause the game ball to enter another ball in the variable winning device 32b, the time limit for triggering the big hit round comes and the big hit It is feared that the situation in which the round ends may easily occur. In this regard, by returning from "yellow count 0" to "red count 1", it is possible to more positively notify that one more game ball can be entered into the variable winning device 32b.

  By using the function (counting means) for counting the number of balls entered into the second variable winning device 32b for each round and the entry detection switch 941, the player is more than necessary in each round in the jackpot state. It is also possible to further suppress the act of launching the game ball. For example, when the upper limit of the game balls for each jackpot round is 8 counts, the number of balls entered into the second variable winning device 32b of the current jackpot round is 6 balls, and the remaining ball counter is “2 In the state of '', basically two remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901 enter the second variable winning device 32b and reach the jackpot upper limit of the big hit round, so the game ball is further hit-rightward winning unit Even if the player enters the ball 901, the game ball can not enter the second variable winning device 32b until the next big hit round is started. Therefore, when the count display becomes “0”, “0” is displayed relatively large (in yellow), or when the game ball is launched, a specific sound effect (for example, buzzer sound) or an announcement Alternatively, it may be configured to output or display on the decorative symbol display device 42 that the launch of the game balls in the current round is sufficient. In this case, efficient launch of the game ball can be assisted, and waste balls can be suppressed. In particular, when the path of the gaming ball from the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901 to the second variable winning device 32b is relatively long as in the fifth embodiment, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited. It will be.

(Cc)
(Cc-1) In the fifth embodiment, the entry detection switch 941 and the discharge detection switch 943 are electrically connected to the main control device 261, and the right-handed winning switch process is performed in the main control device 261, The entry detection switch 941 and the discharge detection switch 943 are electrically connected to the sub controller 262, and in the sub controller 262, for example, detection of the entry detection switch 941 such as right-turn winning switch processing or detection of the discharge detection switch 943 It may be configured to perform processing performed on the basis of. In this case, to monitor the remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901 (as a matter of course, the remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901 may not be monitored), the second start-up winning switch 224b, the second The detection information of the count switch 223b is output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 side performs calculation of the remaining balls.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the sub control device 262 side performs right-turn winning switch processing, the sub control device 262 and the external terminal plate 240 are electrically connected, and from the sub control device 262 to the external terminal plate 240 (hole via A signal corresponding to the occurrence of an error state may be output to a computer or the like. In this case, when an error state occurs, not only the light emission mode of the lamp changes in the pachinko machine 10 itself or an error occurrence sound is output, but it is possible to notify a hall computer etc. . The processing of steps S4803 to S4808 of the right-handed winning unit may be performed not by the main control device 261 but by the sub-control device 262 (right-handed hold icon display processing).

  (Cc-2) Also, in the fifth embodiment, when the game ball entering the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance character 931) is detected by the entry detection switch 941, the ball is in the middle of a large hit In the second variable winning device 32b, the entry sound effect A corresponding to entering the ball (when entering the ball) is output, and if it is in the high entering state, the second start winning device 33b The entry effect sound B corresponding to the entry of the ball (when the ball enters) is output, and the variation display is suspended in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b. A false hold icon 963 indicating that the user is (is) will be displayed, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the entry sound effect A, the entry sound effect B, and the pseudo hold icon 963 may be omitted, or light emitting means may be provided to emit light in response to the detection of the entry detection switch 941 instead of or in addition to such a configuration. A movable part that operates in response to the detection of the entry detection switch 941 may be provided.

  (Cc-3) Furthermore, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the floating ring type pseudo holding icon 963 appears on the right side of the holding display area 961 in the display section of the decorative symbol display device 42 and is displayed on the left holding display area 961. When the indication to move (roll) is displayed and the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is performed, the pseudo hold icon 963 reaches the specified position of the hold display area 961 and stops. It may be configured to switch to the display mode as the hold icon 962. Basically, this means that the formal holding icon 962 is obtained by stopping the operation, but it is also possible to change the shape, the hue, and the like. Also, for example, if detection of the second start winning switch 224b is delayed, the pseudo hold icon 963 rotates when it comes around at the scheduled display position of the hold icon 962 in the hold display area 961 to earn time. It is also possible to display. In addition, while the pseudo-hold icon 963 operates, the hold icon 962 does not only stop the pattern but also does not operate very much (the character as the hold icon 962 moves its hand, changes its expression, etc.) Alternatively, differentiation between the hold icon 962 and the pseudo hold icon 963 may be performed based on a large change in the operation (the operation not to leave the predetermined position of the hold display area 961). However, in the case of a configuration in which the pseudo holding icon 962 also moves, it is desirable to be accompanied by a change in an aspect such as a pattern or a hue, because the differentiation is weak.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, a snowman 966 is adopted as a hold icon, and snow falls from above the hold display area 961 based on the detection of the entrance detection switch 941 in the high ball entry state. The display may be started, and the snowman 967 being created as a pseudo-hold icon may be displayed at a predetermined position of the hold display area 961, and may be configured gradually.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the high entry state, the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 962 is to be displayed, and the hold icon 962 is displayed at the position where the pseudo hold icon 963 was displayed. To allow the player to recognize that the pseudo holding icon 963 has switched to the holding icon 962, but if the pseudo holding icon 963 itself is displaced, the movement is By displaying the hold icon 962 so as to be connected, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo hold icon 963 is switched to the hold icon 962. Although not particularly mentioned in the fifth embodiment, when detection of the entry detection switch 941 is performed in a state where the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed, the pseudo hold icon 963 for this time is set together. A plurality of pseudo hold icons 963 will be displayed in the hold display area 961.

  (Cc-4) Further, in the above embodiment, the bubble display 964 as an additional display displayed in front of the pseudo hold icon 963 is performed together with the pseudo hold icon 963. It is not particularly limited. For example, an additional display such as a curtain of the stage, or an additional display such as a work platform being installed around a pseudo-hold icon 963 and a worker performing a task while working is being performed. You may do it. It is also possible to omit the additional display such as the bubble display 964 or the like.

  However, in order to suppress a situation in which it is difficult to determine which of the pseudo-hold icon 963 and the hold icon 962 is the object currently displayed in the hold display area 961, an additional display such as a bubble display 964 is performed, or It is desirable that the pseudo holding icon 963 itself continues to be displaced (the floating ring rolls as in the above (cc-3), the snowman is gradually made, etc.). In this case, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 has not been determined, and consequently, the pseudo hold icon 963 may be further changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a trouble (such as the fluctuation display is not started although there is a hold or the hold has disappeared) due to the false hold icon 963 being mistaken for the hold icon 962.

  In the case where the trouble as described above occurs, for example, detection history of the entry detection switch 941 (time of each detection), detection history of the second start winning switch 224b, detection history of the second count switch 223b, Alternatively, the detection history of the discharge detection switch 943 may be stored (predetermined amount), and the detection history may be output from the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. In this case, data can be reliably obtained when explaining the circumstances and the like, and the situation where the trouble is disturbed can be avoided.

  (Cc-5) Also, in a state where one or more second variable display is held, the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed for a while even after the detection of the second start winning switch 224b. Continue (naturally, switch to the mode of the hold icon 962 by the start of the corresponding variable display), and for the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963, various lotterys performed by the detection of the second start winning switch 224b It may be configured to be able to reflect the result. For example, "something" in the case where "Eggs" is displayed as a pseudo-hold icon and "Egg is broken and something has popped up" is determined based on the receipt of the start command, and then is held. As the icon, “detailed display of something that has popped out of the egg” may be performed. Here, it is intended that the timing of switching from the pseudo hold icon 963 to the hold icon 962 can be set relatively freely in the state where one or more second variable displays are held, Such switching timing may not necessarily be after the detection of the second start winning switch 224b.

  (Cc-6) A lottery performed on the basis of the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (that the sub control device 262 has received the detection information), and the detection of the entry detection switch 941 (detection information (detection information) May be determined on the basis of a lottery performed based on the fact that the sub control device 262 has received. For example, based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941, the sub controller 262 determines one of the plurality of types of bases of the pseudo hold icon 963. For example, it is assumed that the base includes “male”, “female”, “animal”, and “robot”, and is determined using a random number counter and a pattern table. Subsequently, based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (reception of the advance command), details such as the "president" and the like of the false hold icon 963 and consequently the hold icon 962 are determined. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, in the hold display area 961 of the decorative symbol display device 42, when detection of the entry detection switch 941 is performed, “male”, “female”, “animal” as the pseudo hold icon 963 Alternatively, when any silhouette of the “robot” is displayed (FIG. 73 shows “pseudo-hold icon 963 of“ male ”) and detection of the second start winning switch 224b is performed, the details of such silhouette are gradually revealed. In the form of a hold icon 962 (Fig. 73 shows a hold icon 962 for "man" on the left and a hold icon 962 for "animal" on the right). It is switched and displayed. By adopting the configuration as described above, it is possible to improve the rendering effect using the hold icon 962 and the pseudo hold icon 963.

  It should be noted that among the hold icons 962, an object to be determined based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (the detection of the detection information by the sub control device 262) or the detection of the entry detection switch 941 (sub control of detection information The target to be determined based on the fact that the device 262 has received is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, when “car” is adopted as the hold icon 962, only “front half of the car” is displayed as the pseudo hold icon 963 based on the detection of the entrance detection switch 941, Based on the reception of the advance command, the entire car as the hold icon 962 may be displayed in a state in which “rear half of the car” is added. In this case, the false hold icon 963 is clearly an incomplete aspect, and the situation where the false hold icon 963 is confused with the hold icon 962 can be avoided more reliably.

  Further, among the holding icons 962, a pattern determined based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (that the sub control device 262 has received the detection information) and the detection of the entry detection switch 941 (sub control of the detection information For example, it may be configured to teach / suggest an expectation such as a jackpot state or a latent mode by combination with a pattern determined based on the fact that the device 262 has received it. That is, based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, the base (predetermined parts part) of the reserve icon 962 is determined to be "Airplane", and corresponds to the disconnection based on the reception of the advance command. If it is fluctuation information, it is easy to finish on a relatively small and basic paint (post-decision parts part) airplane, while if it is fluctuation information corresponding to a big hit, it is a comparatively large and flashy pint plane It may be configured so as to be easy to finish and also that a special paint may be selected to teach the occurrence of a jackpot condition. In this way, when determining the pattern of the details of the hold icon 962 determined by the reception of the first command among the hold icons 962, as a result of the lottery etc. included in the first command or the detection of the entry detection switch 941 already. By referring to the base of the hold icon 962 determined in the above, and adopting a configuration in which the expectation for winning to the jackpot state etc. is taught / suggested in the manner of the hold icon 962, the hold icon 962 and the pseudo hold icon 963 are selected. It is possible to have a stronger interest in

  The pattern of the hold icon 962 is basically determined along with the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941, and has already been detected when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. The hold icon 962 of the pattern being determined may be displayed. Also, a lottery may be performed to determine whether the reserved icon 962 of the pattern already determined is displayed as it is or the reserved icon 962 corresponding to the contents (preceding command) such as a lottery for success or failure.

[Supplementary note]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state, and the variable display device makes a lottery result The variable display for teaching is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2003-154110).

  In general, in a pachinko machine, the so-called electronic tulip in which the gaming ball changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter. A variable ball entry device called an attacker or the like is provided. Then, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  Furthermore, although such a variable ball entry device is designed to be opened based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, there are many cases where opening and closing are periodically repeated a plurality of times based on the establishment of one predetermined condition. Therefore, taking advantage of the fact that the opening and closing of the variable ball entry device is periodic, when the variable ball entry device is in the open state, the game ball is fired at such a timing as to reach the variable ball entry device By performing a technical operation to refrain from launching the gaming ball at such a timing as reaching the variable ball entry device when the ball device is in the closed state, the number of gaming balls that do not enter the variable winning means is reduced. , It is possible to increase the total number of game balls to be finally acquired.

  However, there are players who perform such technical operations, players who do not perform such operations, or players who do not perform well, and it is not uncommon for a relatively large difference to occur in the total number of game balls finally acquired. Absent.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an unfair feeling due to a technology difference between players.

Means A1-1. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
A game ball entering the specified winning opening is (a certainty) arranged at a specific point on a specific entering route where it passes (closed), making it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the specified winning opening An openable member capable of changing state between the state and the open state capable of entering or facilitating entering the ball;
When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the game ball can not be normally used for the gaming ball (it is not possible to pass the specific point to the specific winning opening side due to the opening and closing member being in the closed state). A game machine characterized by comprising time difference passing opportunity giving means for giving an opportunity to pass the specific point at another (following) timing.

  When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the possibility that the game ball passes the specific point to the specific winning hole side is low (effectively) and the possibility of entering the specific winning hole is low (effectively). On the other hand, according to the means A1-1, when the open / close member is in the closed state, the specific point is passed to the specific winning hole side due to the open / close member being in the closed state. It is possible to give an opportunity to pass a specific point at a timing different from the normal timing (at a timing later than the present timing) for a gaming ball which can not be played. For this reason, even if the game ball is allowed to reach the specific point as it is, the game ball is specified compared to the case where the game ball is brought to the specific point at the timing when the specific point is closed by the opening / closing member. Bringing the game ball to a specific point at a different timing (at a predetermined time later than now) by increasing the possibility that the opening and closing member is in the open state by reaching the point. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the specific point to the specific winning hole side and enters the specific winning hole. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the specific points and entering the specific winning opening and the specific points are reached, but the opening / closing member is restricted It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning opening in the ratio of the number of gaming balls excluded to the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched for the specific winning opening, it does not reach into the ball. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls are efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby making the game Progress slightly (if you want to make it into the electric chew, you can raise the tempo of the change display, and do not lose the hold of the change display, and if you make it to the attacker, make the round progress smoothly Can).

  Also, in general, when the opening and closing member is in the open state, the game ball is fired at the timing to reach the specific point, and when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the gaming ball is reached to the specific point It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the specific winning opening by performing a technical operation such as refraining from the launch of. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of gaming balls fired and the total number of gaming balls paid out (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the part of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, the larger the number of players who perform the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, or the various winning openings from which game balls are paid out. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility of balls reaching and entering, and there is a risk that the burden on players who do not perform the above-mentioned technical operations may be further increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at a timing to reach a specific point when the open / close member is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. Even if the game balls are kept firing, the generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

Means A1-2. And opening and closing lottery means for performing an opening and closing lottery on whether the opening and closing member is to be opened based on a predetermined opportunity,
The means A1-1 is characterized in that there is a first state that is won with the first probability in the opening and closing lottery, and a second state that is won with the second probability that is higher than the first probability in the opening and closing lottery The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A1-2, the second winning state in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently and the first state in which the opening and closing member is not opened very much allow the player to play the game by aiming at the specific winning opening. It is possible to create a state in which a ball can be hit and the game can be progressed with ease, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if the game ball is hit and aimed at the specific winning combination opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch position of the game ball must be substantially changed, to add tonation to the game state, and to improve the playability.

  In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched to aim at the specific winning combination may be configured to enter the specific winning combination. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely. In particular, it was fired in the case of composition that one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering a specific winning opening (as a part of the correction of the difference by the above-mentioned technical operation) If the game ball does not enter the specified winning opening (as it is in a situation where it does not basically enter the other winning opening), the game ball on hand will surely decrease, but in the second state In the case where almost all of the launched game balls enter the specific winning opening, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when entering the specified winning combination, the number of payout game balls is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably establish the game property that the number of game balls on hand is not reduced as much as possible.

  Means A1-3. The gaming machine according to the means A1-1 or A1-2, further comprising: rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the specific point (opening and closing member).

  According to the means A1-3, by providing the flow straightening means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball before reaching the specific point, the irregular regarding the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball entering the specific point It can be reduced. Therefore, when the opening / closing member is closed by the time difference passing opportunity giving means, an opportunity to bring the gaming ball to a specific point at another timing is given to improve the probability of entering the specific winning opening. The effect can be made even more secure. Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

Means A1-4. The opening and closing member includes a shutter that can slide in the front and rear direction,
The open / close member is brought into a closed state by displacing the shutter to a closed position projecting into the game area, and the open / close member is brought into an open state by displacing the shutter into an open position withdrawn from the game area,
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to A1-3, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

  According to the means A1-4, by sliding the shutter in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be made to enter the specified winning opening by the falling motion, and smooth entering of the specified winning opening can be achieved. Can be realized. In addition, for example, when opening the specific winning a prize opening by rotating the shutter extending forward and backward, the game ball thought to have entered the specific winning a prize mouth is thrown up to the outside by the shutter. It is possible to avoid such a situation. Furthermore, for example, in the configuration in which the specified winning opening is opened by pivoting the shutter extending forward and backward downward, a large amount of gaming balls fall on the shutter at one time and the shutter is opened even though it is not the opening timing. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the specific winning opening.

  Also, a relatively large load is likely to be applied to the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the gaming ball when in the closed position, but like the present means, a support that supports the lower surface of the front end of the shutter By providing the member, the load on the root side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation in which the shutter is broken at the root side can be prevented.

  Note that “a rib may be formed on the back surface side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the gaming ball collides with the shutter. Alternatively, “a buffer may be provided on the shutter or a member that is supported in contact with the shutter in the closed position”. In this case, it is possible to reduce the impact when the shutter receives the game ball and to suppress the damage and the collision sound.

  Means A2-1. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is an introduction path along which the game ball whose passage of the specific point to the specific winning opening side is restricted by the open / close member in the closed state (although the specific point is reached) is guided. And the re-entry path for guiding the gaming ball having entered the introduction path to the specific point, the gaming machine according to the means A1.

  According to the means A2-1, although the gaming ball has reached the specific point, the opening / closing member is not yet in the open state, so the game ball is said to go to the specific point again after killing a little time A series of actions of can be derived. That is, the opening and closing member is in the closed state when the gaming ball first reaches the specific point, but at the timing when the gaming ball reaches the specific point again after a predetermined time via the time difference passing opportunity giving means, the opening and closing member May have been opened. Therefore, even if the attempt to pass the first specific point fails, the same gaming ball can access the specific point multiple times so that you can try again later, so as to enter the specific winning opening The above-described operation and effect of ensuring that the game balls launched into the game area are efficiently entered into the specified winning combination are exhibited. As a matter of course, if the opening / closing member is in the open state when the gaming ball first reaches the specific point, the gaming ball will pass the specific point and enter the specific winning hole at that stage. .

  Means A2-2. The gaming machine according to the means A2-1, wherein the gaming ball having reached the specific point is guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member in a closed state.

  According to the means A2-2, since the game ball can be guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member when the opening / closing member for opening / closing the route to the specific winning opening is closed, the game ball is guided to the introduction path There is no need to separately provide a movable member for the purpose, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, and suppression of cost increase can be achieved. In this means, the opening and closing member in the closed state constitutes a part of the time difference passing opportunity giving means for the gaming ball.

  "The opening and closing member is provided with a shutter that can slide in the front and rear direction, and the opening and closing member is closed by displacing the shutter to a closed position projecting into the game area, and the shutter exits from the game area The opening and closing member may be in the open state by being displaced to the open position. In this case, the game ball can be made to enter the specific winning opening by the falling motion of the game ball, and the game ball can be reliably guided by the upper surface of the shutter in the closed position.

  Means A2-3. The re-entry route of the game ball from the specific point through the introduction path and the re-entry path to the specific point again does not intersect at least other than the specific point. The gaming machine according to the means A2-1 or A2-2.

  Means A2-3. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game balls collide with each other in the middle of the re-entry route. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably guide the game ball moving on the re-entry route to a specific point at an initial timing. In addition, even if the game balls collide with each other at the specific point, if the open / close member is in the open state, the specific point will pass to the specific winning hole side as it is.

Means A2-4. Normal starting means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving through the game area, or to be capable of entering a ball;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means or entered the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state in which the winning support lottery is won with a first probability and a second state in which the winning support lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability,
In a state in which the variable winning means is opened by being won by the success / fall lottery, the first state is set for the support lottery,
In the gaming area, the gaming machine according to the means A2-1 to A2-3, wherein the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means.

  According to the means A2-4, in the state where the variable winning means is opened by winning the success or failure lottery, the first gaming state is set for the support lottery, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. Most game balls come through the introduction route and the re-entry route. On the other hand, for example, when the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the approach of the game ball to the variable winning means is delayed because the gaming ball passes through the introduction path and the re-entry path. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball from the specific point, through the introduction path and the re-entry path to the specific point again, even if the re-entry route crosses even on the specific point, the gaming ball The game balls may not easily enter the ball by the variable winning means, for example, due to contact with each other and the residence time in the special starting means becoming longer. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means on the upstream side of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball in the variable winning means. Furthermore, in a state where the variable winning means is in the open state, the load on the opening and closing member is reduced by reducing the number of gaming balls entering the special starting means (the entry to the specific winning opening is prevented by the opening and closing member). It can be reduced.

  In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the gaming ball enters the ball in the variable winning means on the upstream side, and the game ball flows to the special starting means side It is not necessary for the player to visually recognize an aspect in which a large number of game balls enter the special starting means and the flow becomes bad.

Means A3-1. The opening and closing member is provided with a shutter that can be displaced between a closed position where the game ball can not enter the specific winning opening and an open position where the ball can enter.
When the shutter is in the closed position, the gaming ball whose entry into the specified winning opening is restricted by the shutter moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. And
The shutter constitutes the time difference passing opportunity giving means.
The gaming machine according to the means A1, characterized in that when the shutter is in the open position, a gaming ball in contact with the shutter is configured to enter the specified winning opening.

  According to the means A3-1, when the open / close member is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the specific point is restricted from entering the specific winning opening by the shutter, but the contact with the shutter is as it is It will move along the longitudinal direction of a shutter, maintaining a state. Then, when the opening / closing member is opened, that is, when the shutter is opened, the gaming ball which has been in contact with the shutter (is leaning or resting) passes through the specific point and is identified. You will enter the winning opening. In this way, by making the staying time of the game ball at a specific point as long as possible, the open / close member can enter the specific winning opening if the open / close member is open, and wait for the timing when the open / close member will be opened next Can. Therefore, the above-described operation and effect of efficiently entering the specified winning combination with the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specified combination opening can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, even if the opening time of the opening and closing member is relatively short, the game ball that is leaning (for example, mounted) on the shutter can be made to enter the specific winning opening. That is, for example, when the shutter is closed, the gaming ball can be placed on the shutter, and all of them can be made to enter the specified winning opening with the short opening of the shutter. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without lengthening the total opening time of the opening and closing member. Therefore, when the specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are embodied as an attacker who is opened in the special gaming state by winning in the lottery, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between the rounds are round The attacker will enter the ball with the start, and time efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time, when it is embodied in the electric chew that is released when it is won in the entry support state by winning in the entry support lottery. It can be realized, and this can create new playability.

Means A3-2. The shutter (which is configured to be slidable back and forth) extends in the back and forth direction at the closed position, and the longitudinal direction is the left and right direction,
When the shutter is in the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specified winning opening, and the game according to the means A3-1 characterized in that Machine.

  According to the means A3-2, the shutter in the closed position closing the specific winning opening extends forward and backward, and when the shutter is in the open position, the gaming ball having lost the support of the shutter falls downward. It is supposed to enter the special winning opening at. For this reason, for example, the shutter extends vertically and moves the gaming ball backward, so that the action and reaction of the gaming ball until the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening is quicker than entering the specific winning opening by moving the gaming ball backward. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to relatively quickly enter the specified winning opening with the gaming ball whose entry to the specified winning opening has been restricted by the shutter.

  Means A3-3. A gaming machine according to the means A3-1 or A3-2 comprising rectifying means for guiding the gaming ball to an upstream portion of the shutter.

  According to the means A3-3, by reliably guiding the gaming ball to the upstream side with respect to the shutter, the state in which the gaming ball is in contact with the shutter (shutter-like state) is made as long as possible. The action and effect will be more reliably exerted.

  Means A3-4. A gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-2 characterized by having drop-off preventing means for maintaining a state where the gaming ball is in contact with the shutter.

  According to the means A3-4, it is possible to suppress the game ball from falling off the upper surface of the shutter.

  Means A3-5. The gaming machine according to any one of the means A3-1 to A3-4, wherein small irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter.

  According to the means A3-5, when the open / close member is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state in which the player can enter the specified winning opening as long as possible.

Means A3-6. Normal start means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving in the game area;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are adapted to the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means A3-1 to A3-5, wherein the variable winning means is disposed downstream of the special starting means in the game area.

  As in the above means A3-1, the shutter of the open / close member in the closed state needs to support the gaming ball (in particular, it supports the lower surface side of the gaming ball when the shutter extends back and forth), There is a large burden on receiving game balls that have fallen. In this respect, as in the present means A3-6, by arranging the variable winning means on the downstream side of the special starting means, the number of gaming balls moved toward the variable winning means by the amount of entering the special starting means As a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means A4-1. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is installed upstream of the specific point in the specific entering route,
When the opening / closing member is in the open state or in a state corresponding to the open state, the game ball reaches the specific point after a first time period since it reaches the time difference passing opportunity giving means. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is opened,
When the opening / closing member is in the closed state or in a state corresponding to the closed state, the time difference passing opportunity giving means is closed and the closed state causes the time difference passing opportunity giving means to play a game. The gaming machine according to the means A1, which is configured to reach the specific point after a second time which is longer than the first time has elapsed since the ball reached the time difference passing opportunity giving means.

  When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the opening and closing member in the closed state prevents the game ball reaching the time difference passing opportunity giving means from flowing into the specific point as it is and enters the specified winning hole. I can not In such a case, according to the means A4-1, the opening / closing member is closed as much as possible by delaying the timing at which the gaming ball reaches the specific point, instead of causing the gaming ball to reach the specific point at a normal timing. When not in the state, that is, when the open / close member is in the open state, the gaming ball can be configured to reach a specific point. Therefore, the above-described operation and effect of efficiently entering the specified winning combination with the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specified combination opening can be reliably achieved.

  The time until the game ball reaches the specific point from the time difference passing opportunity giving means changes depending on the distance between the specific point and the time difference passing opportunity giving means. Therefore, for example, when the opening / closing member is in the open state, it is possible to pass the specific point by bringing the gaming ball to the specific point as it is with the time difference passing opportunity giving means open. It can not generally be said that it becomes correspondence. For that reason, "when the opening / closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to the open state" and "when the opening / closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to the closed state" are specific points; In consideration of the distance between the time difference passing opportunity giving means, etc., by the time the game ball located in the time difference passing opportunity giving means reaches a specific point, the open / close member will be in the open state, etc. Based on the simulation of the above, it is intended that the timing and period for setting the time difference passing opportunity giving means in the closed state are set for each model.

  Further, synchronization means may be provided to synchronize the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing member with the operation timing of the time difference passing opportunity giving means. The synchronization means may be, for example, an interlock mechanism that interlocks mechanically, or may be control means that opens and operates with the same opening / operating timing and opening / operating conditions. The control unit may be a control unit that measures the opening timing of the opening and closing member and adjusts the timing.

  Means A4-2. The time difference passing opportunity giving means includes a stopper capable of changing the state to a first state for holding the gaming ball and a second state for passing the game ball without holding the game ball. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A4-2, when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the gaming ball can be parked on the upstream side of the specific point. Therefore, by shifting the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point, the possibility that the game ball will reach the specific point and pass when the opening / closing member is in the open state can be enhanced.

  Means A4-3. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is provided with a travel distance changing means capable of lengthening or shortening the distance of the route through which the game ball reaches the specific point. The gaming machine according to the means A4-1 .

  According to the means A4-3, it is possible to delay the timing to reach a specific point by rotating the gaming ball more than usual.

Means A4-4. A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery as to whether or not the opening and closing member is in an open state;
And a variable display means for displaying a variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery,
While the variable display means is performing variable display, the time difference passing opportunity giving means is closed.
The gaming machine according to any one of the means A4-1 to A4-3, wherein the time difference passing opportunity giving means is opened in a state where the variable display means stops the variable display.

  According to the means A4-4, the game ball is guided to the specific winning hole when the game ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole, and the game ball is likely to be difficult to enter the specific winning hole. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of reaching the specific winning combination (afterward) is shifted.

  The above means A2, A3 and A4 are basically considered to be used alone respectively, but the means A2 is configured downstream of the specific point, and the means A3 is specific point configuration, As the means A4 has a configuration upstream of the specific point, it is possible to divide the situation, and in some cases, it is also possible to use them in combination.

Means B-1. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
It has an open / close member capable of changing the state between an open state enabling entry of the game ball to the specific winning opening and a closed state disabling entry.
If the opening / closing member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the first specific point capable of entering the specified winning opening if the opening / closing member is in the open state, the game ball is closed by the opening / closing member A gaming machine characterized by further comprising ball entering opportunity giving means for guiding to a second specified point where the player can enter the specified winning combination if the player is in the open state.

  According to the means B-1, when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, if the opening and closing member is in the open state, the gaming ball has reached the first specific point where the player can enter the specific winning opening Also, the game ball will be guided to the second specified point where the player can enter the specified winning opening if the open / close member is in the open state. For this reason, an opportunity to try to enter the specified winning combination will be given again to the gaming ball that could not enter the specified winning combination, and the possibility of the game ball entering the specified winning combination is increased. Can. Therefore, among the game balls launched for aiming at entering a specific winning opening, the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specific winning opening and the number of gaming balls not entering the specific winning opening The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning combination can be increased.

  Also, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing that the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the specified winning opening, so even if the game ball continues to be fired The generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls to be acquired between the player who performs a so-called technical operation such as a strike and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means B-2. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
A first specified winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter, and a second specified winning opening;
A game ball entering the first specified winning opening is disposed at a first specified point on a first specified entering route where the game ball will pass (must), and the game entering the first specified winning opening A first opening / closing member that can change state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult, and an open state that makes it possible to enter or facilitate entering a ball;
A game ball entering the second specified winning opening is disposed at a second specified point on a second specified entering route where the game ball will pass (always), and the game entering the second specified winning opening And a second opening / closing member that can change state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult, and an open state that allows entering or facilitating entering a ball,
When the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, (the first specific point can not be passed to the first specified winning opening side due to the first opening and closing member being in the closed state) 2.) A game machine characterized by comprising a ball entry opportunity giving means for guiding a game ball to the second specified ball entry route.

  When the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, the possibility of the game ball passing the first specified point to the first specified winning opening side is low (effectively virtually), and it is expected to enter the first specified winning opening There is little (effectively). On the other hand, according to the means B-1, when the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point is set to the first specific point because the first opening and closing member is in the closed state. (1) A game ball which can not pass to the specified winning combination side can be guided to a second specified entering route leading to the second specified winning combination. For this reason, an opportunity to try to enter the second specified winning combination will be given to the gaming ball that could not enter the first specified winning combination, and the gaming ball becomes a specified winning combination (first specified winning opening And the possibility of entering the second specified winning combination) can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the specific points and entering the specific winning opening and the specific points are reached, but the opening / closing member is restricted It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning opening in the ratio of the number of gaming balls excluded to the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched for the specific winning opening, it does not reach into the ball. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls are efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby making the game Can be advanced slightly (if it is embodied as electric chew, it is possible to increase the number of rotations of the variable display, and when it is embodied as an attacker, it is possible to smoothly advance the round).

  Also, in general, when the opening and closing member is in the open state, the game ball is fired at the timing to reach the specific point, and when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the gaming ball is reached to the specific point It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the specific winning opening by performing a technical operation such as refraining from the launch of. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of gaming balls fired and the total number of gaming balls paid out (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the part of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, the larger the number of players who perform the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, or the various winning openings from which game balls are paid out. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility of balls reaching and entering, and there is a risk that the burden on players who do not perform the above-mentioned technical operations may be further increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this means, the game ball enters the second specified winning opening even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the first specific point when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state. Since there is a possibility, the generation of wasted balls which do not enter the specific winning combination (the first specific winning combination and the second specific winning combination) is suppressed even if the game balls are continuously fired. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  As a matter of course, if the first opening and closing member is in the open state when the gaming ball first reaches the first specific point, the gaming ball passes the first specific point at that stage and the first specific winning combination You will enter the mouth. Further, the timing at which the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are in the open state and the timing at which the first opening / closing member is in the opening state may be simultaneous. Furthermore, the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening have the same role, and, for example, the game player enters either of the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening. The number of game values (prize balls) to be paid out may be the same, and when the predetermined lottery is performed based on entering the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening, the same random number counter and the same The lottery table may be used, and as the special gaming state advantageous to the player, the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening are opened with the lapse of the prescribed time or the prescribed number of balls being the upper limit. In the case of a configuration in which a plurality of round periods, which are periods, are provided with a closed interval period, a plurality of rounds, whether entering the first specified winning opening or the second specified winning opening, are rounds Number of balls counted to the upper limit of the period It may be counted. By connecting the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member so as to operate integrally, it is possible to achieve commonality of the driving means for operating these, and separately drive control. As in the case of the above, it is not necessary to perform control to measure the timing of synchronization, etc., and simplification of the configuration and control can be achieved.

Means B-3. And opening and closing lottery means for performing an opening and closing lottery on whether the opening and closing member is to be opened based on a predetermined opportunity,
Means B-1 characterized in that there is a first state to be won at the first probability in the opening and closing lottery, and a second state to be elected at the second probability higher than the first probability in the opening and closing lottery The gaming machine described in B-2.

  According to the means B-3, the game is carried out aiming at the specific winning hole by the existence of the second state in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently and the first state in which the opening and closing member is not opened very much. It is possible to create a state in which a ball can be hit and the game can be progressed with ease, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if the game ball is hit and aimed at the specific winning combination opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch position of the game ball must be substantially changed, to add tonation to the game state, and to improve the playability.

  In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched to aim at the specific winning combination may be configured to enter the specific winning combination. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering the specified winning hole, if the launched game ball does not enter the specified winning hole (others Basically, the game balls in hand will definitely decrease, but almost all of the game balls fired in the second state will enter the specified winning hole. In such a configuration, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when entering the specified winning combination, the number of payout game balls is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably establish the game property that the number of game balls on hand is not reduced as much as possible.

  Means B-4. The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-3, further comprising: rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the first specific point.

  According to the means B-4, the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball entering the first specific point by providing the rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball before reaching the first specific point Irregularity with respect to Therefore, when the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, the game ball is sent to the second specified ball entry route by the ball entering opportunity giving means to improve the ball entering probability to the second specified winning hole The action and effect can be made more reliable.

  Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

Means B-5. The opening and closing member (at least the first opening and closing member corresponding to the means B-2) includes a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction,
The open / close member is brought into a closed state by displacing the shutter to a closed position projecting into the game area, and the open / close member is brought into an open state by displacing the shutter into an open position withdrawn from the game area,
A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

  According to the means B-5, when the shutter slides in the front-rear direction, the game ball can enter the specified winning opening by the falling motion, and for example, the specific winning opening is rotated by the rotating shutter. In the case of closing, it is possible to avoid a situation where the gaming ball thought to have entered the specific winning combination is thrown up to the shutter and thrown out to the outside.

  Also, a relatively large load is likely to be applied to the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the gaming ball when in the closed position, but like the present means, a support that supports the lower surface of the front end of the shutter By providing the member, the load on the root side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation in which the shutter is broken at the root side can be prevented.

  Note that “a rib may be formed on the back surface side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the gaming ball collides with the shutter. In addition, “a buffer material may be provided at a part of the opening and closing member that contacts the gaming ball and regulates passage of the specific point of the gaming ball”. In this case, it is possible to reduce the impact when the shutter receives the game ball.

  Means B-6. The game ball that has reached the first specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state is closed to the second point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific entry route). The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-5, wherein the gaming machine is guided by the opening and closing member.

  According to the means B-6, when the opening and closing member for opening and closing the first specified point (the first specified entering route to the first specified winning hole) is in the closed state, the game ball can be Since it is possible to guide to the second specific entering route), there is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding the game ball to the second specific point (the second specific entering route), and the configuration is simplified. And the increase in cost can be suppressed. Further, in this means, the (first) opening / closing member in the closed state constitutes the ball entering opportunity giving means.

  Means B-7. The second specific point (corresponding to the means B-2) is configured to be enterable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entrance opportunity giving means to the second specific sound entering route. A gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-6 characterized in that.

  Although there is a possibility that the game ball which could not enter the (first) specific winning opening at the first specific point may enter the (second) specific winning opening at the second specific point, 2) Since there is no possibility that the game ball that could not enter the specified winning opening enters the (first) specified winning opening at the first specific point, for example, directly via the entering opportunity giving means When the game ball is configured to be able to enter the (second) specific winning combination at the second specific point, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific winning combination is reduced. In this respect, according to the means B-7, first, the player attempts to enter the (first) specified winning combination at the first specified point, and if it is not good, the (second) specified winning at the second specified point The order of entering the mouth can be adhered to, and the effect of improving the possibility of entering the specified winning combination can be achieved more reliably.

Means B-8. Normal starting means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving through the game area, or to be capable of entering a ball;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means or entered the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The specified winning opening and the opening / closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state in which the winning support lottery is won with a first probability and a second state in which the winning support lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability,
In a state in which the variable winning means is opened by being won by the success / fall lottery, the first state is set for the support lottery,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, wherein the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

  According to the means B-8, in a state in which the variable winning means is opened by winning the success or failure lottery, the first gaming state is set for the support lottery, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. Most game balls come to be discharged outside the special starting means without passing through the second specified entering route and further entering the second specified winning opening. On the other hand, for example, when the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the game ball is routed through the special starting means (the first specific entering route and the second specific entering route) Approach to the variable winning means of the ball is delayed. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means on the upstream side of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball in the variable winning means.

  In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the gaming ball enters the ball in the variable winning means on the upstream side, and the game ball flows to the special starting means side It is not necessary for the player to visually recognize an aspect in which a large number of game balls enter the special starting means and the flow becomes bad.

  C. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state, and the variable display device makes a lottery result The variable display for teaching is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2003-154110).

  In addition, in general, in the pachinko machine, the game ball changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter, and the game ball enters. A variable ball entry device is provided in which a predetermined number of winning balls are given by balling.

  By the way, in the special gaming state in which the variable ball entry device is in the open state, various game members such as game nails and the like are arranged in the game area even if the game ball is kept firing at a constant rhythm. There is a concern that the opening timing of the variable ball entry device and the timing at which the game ball reaches the variable ball entry device do not engage well and a situation may occur in which the ball can not be easily entered.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of more efficiently entering a game ball into a variable ball entry device. is there.

Means C-1. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
The game ball moving in the game area is provided with a variable ball entry device that changes state to an open state in which the ball can or can not enter the ball, and a closed state in which the ball can or can not enter the ball.
The variable ball entry device
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
It has a closed position which makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening, and a shutter which can be displaced between the open position which allows the ball to enter.
A ball entry opportunity giving means for displacing the gaming ball whose entry into the specified winning opening is restricted by the shutter in a prescribed direction while maintaining the contact state to the shutter when the shutter is in the closed position. Equipped
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the shutter is in the open position, a game ball in contact with the shutter enters the specified winning opening.

  According to the means C-1, when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the variable ball entry device is restricted from winning by the specified winning opening by the shutter, but it is It moves in a specified direction while maintaining the contact state of Then, when the shutter is in the open position and the variable ball entry device is in the open state, almost all of the gaming balls that were in contact with the shutter (which were leaning or resting) were in the specific winning opening. It will hit the ball. In this way, if the variable ball entry device is in the open state, by specifying as long as possible the stay time of the gaming ball at the position (state) where the ball will enter the specific winning opening if the shutter is in the open position While maintaining the state of the gaming ball that can enter the winning opening, it is possible to wait for the timing when the variable ball entry device is next opened. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the specified winning opening with the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specified winning opening.

  Furthermore, even if the open time of the variable ball entry device is relatively short, the game ball that is leaning (for example, mounted) on the shutter can be made to enter the specified winning hole. . That is, for example, as long as the game ball is put on the shutter when the shutter is closed, it is possible to cause all of them to enter the specified winning opening with the short opening of the shutter. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined plurality of gaming balls without lengthening the total opening time of the variable ball entry device. Therefore, when the specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are embodied as an attacker who is opened in the special gaming state by winning in the lottery, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between the rounds are round The attacker will enter the ball with the start, and time efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time, when it is embodied in the electric chew that is released when it is won in the entry support state by winning in the entry support lottery. It can be realized, and this can create new playability.

  Also, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing that the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the specified winning opening, so the game ball continues to be fired Even in this case, the generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. Therefore, while the variable ball entry device is in the open state a predetermined number of times (eg, a special gaming state advantageous to the player) while holding the period in which it is in the closed state, so-called technical operations such as socking It is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who does the game and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  Means C-2. The ball entry opportunity giving means moves the gaming ball in contact with the shutter in the closed position by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. The gaming machine according to the means C-1.

  According to the means C-2, when the shutter is in the open position, it is possible to keep as long as possible a state in which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening. Therefore, even when the variable ball entry device is in the open state a plurality of times, even if the game ball is hit at such a timing that it reaches the variable ball entry device when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, The gaming ball moves as soon as it can enter the variable ball entry device as soon as the variable ball entry device is in the open state, but stays within the range as much as possible, and the variable ball entry device is then opened. You can wait for the timing to be done. As a result, the above-mentioned effects such as enhancing the possibility of ball entry into the variable ball entry device can be more reliably achieved.

  For example, “the shutter at least in the closed position extends back and forth so that gaming balls can be placed on the top surface thereof, and the entering opportunity giving means places the gaming balls on the top surface of the shutter, On the upper surface of the shutter, for example, a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter may be moved.

  It should be noted that “small unevenness may be formed on the upper surface of the shutter as the ball entering opportunity giving means”. In this case, when the shutter is in the open position, the function and effect of keeping the state of being able to enter the specific winning combination opening as long as possible can be reliably achieved. Further, for example, the upper surface of the shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape having a low center and high left and right, and the game ball placed on the shutter reciprocates to the left and right and drops from the shutter when the force is weakened May be

Means C-3. The shutter is the closed position projecting in the game area and extending in the front-rear direction above the specific winning opening, and an open position in which all or most exit from the game area to open the specific winning opening upward Slideable back and forth between the
When the shutter is in the open position, a game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specified winning opening, or means C-1 or C- The gaming machine according to 2.

  According to the means C-3, the game ball is placed (stored) on the upper surface of the shutter in the closed state of the variable ball entry device, and the support of the shutter is lost when the variable ball entry device is opened. When the gaming ball falls downward, it enters the specified winning opening. For this reason, for example, the shutter extends vertically and moves the gaming ball backward, so that the action and reaction of the gaming ball until the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening is quicker than entering the specific winning opening by moving the gaming ball backward. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to win the game winning ball whose entry into the specific winning opening has been restricted by the shutter relatively quickly to the specific winning opening.

  In addition, for example, when opening the specific winning a prize opening by rotating the shutter extending forward and backward, the game ball thought to have entered the specific winning a prize mouth is thrown up to the outside by the shutter. It is possible to avoid such a situation. Furthermore, for example, in the configuration in which the shutter extending longitudinally is pivoted downward to open the specific winning opening, a large number of gaming balls fall on the shutter at one time and the shutter is not at the timing of opening due to weight or impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific winning opening by being opened to

  Note that the shutter has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction, and the ball entering opportunity giving means is configured to place the game ball on the upper surface of the shutter against the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter. It is also possible to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter toward the longitudinal direction downstream side of the shutter while meandering in the cross direction. Generally, the width of the front and back of the game area defined by the game board and the transparent plate disposed in front thereof is smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, while meandering the gaming ball resting on the upper surface of the shutter in a direction intersecting the short direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, or from the center side of the substantially circular shutter to the outer peripheral side If it is necessary to make the front and rear width of the shutter wider than the front and rear width of the game area when trying to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while turning it towards, the game ball moving on the shutter As a suitable starting point, it may be necessary to select a point behind the front of the game board. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this respect, if the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is only meandered in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, the front and rear width of the shutter is made wider than the front and rear width of the game area Even if not, it is possible to move the gaming ball on the shutter by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Means C-4. The gaming machine according to the means C-3, wherein the ball entering opportunity giving means is formed by forming asperities on the upper surface of the shutter.

  For example, instead of forming asperities on the shutter side, the ball entrance opportunity giving means is configured by forming a protrusion that protrudes inward from the opening peripheral edge of the specified winning opening above the shutter in the closed position. When the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is guided by the projection and moved while meandering, the projection is inside the opening periphery of the specific winning opening even if the shutter is displaced to the open position. Since it will remain in the state which protruded on the circumference side, there is a possibility that the ease of entering of the game ball to a specific winning a prize mouth may fall.

  In this respect, as in the present means C-4, when the shutter is displaced to the open position by forming the concavities and convexities forming the ball entering opportunity giving means on the shutter side, the whole or the ball entering opportunity giving means also Such problems can be wiped out because most of them leave the game area.

Means C-5. The variable ball entry device comprises a substantially plate-like base plate attached to the game board,
The base plate is formed with a housing opening for projecting and retracting the shutter.
The upper portion of the housing opening of the front surface of the base plate is inclined rearward and upward.
The gaming machine according to the means C-4, wherein the gaming ball moving on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to be capable of coming into contact with a portion lower than the center of the gaming ball.

  As in the case of the above-mentioned means C-3, in the case where the shutter extends back and forth and is displaceable back and forth, and as in the case of the above-mentioned means C-4, when irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter, When pulling the shutter to the game board side to bring it to the open position, there is a concern that the gaming ball placed on the shutter is pressed against the convex part of the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate, and the force will pop off by that force. Ru.

  In this respect, according to the means C-5, when the shutter is in the open position, it is assumed that the gaming ball on the shutter is at a position where it is likely to be pinched by the convex portion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate. Also, the game ball is relatively smooth as the game ball rests on the upper part of the accommodation opening of the base plate which is inclined rearward and directed upward and abuts against the part below the central part of the game ball. It is possible to get over the convex part to the specific winning hole side. Therefore, the game ball on the shutter can be more reliably entered into the specified winning opening when the shutter is in the open position, and damage to the variable ball entry device and the like can be suppressed.

  Means C-6. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-5, further comprising a support member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter is displaced to the closed position. .

  According to the means C-6, a relatively large load is likely to be applied to the shutter which extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower side of the gaming ball when in the closed position, but the support for supporting the lower surface of the front end of the shutter By providing the member, the load on the root side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation in which the shutter is broken at the root side can be prevented.

  Note that “a rib may be formed on the back surface side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the gaming ball collides with the shutter. Alternatively, “a buffer may be provided on the shutter or a member that is supported in contact with the shutter in the closed position”. In this case, it is possible to reduce the impact when the shutter receives the game ball and to suppress the damage and the collision sound.

Means C-7. Normal start means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving in the game area;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The variable winning device is configured by the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is disposed downstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

  As in the above means C-3, the shutter in the closed position needs to receive the dropped game ball, and the burden on that time is large. In this respect, as in the present means C-7, by arranging the variable winning means as the variable ball entry device on the downstream side of the special starting means, the variable winning means is directed to the variable winning means by the amount entering the special starting means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-8. Normal start means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving in the game area;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The variable starting device is constituted by the special starting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

  The shutter in the closed position needs to receive the dropped game ball, and the burden on that time is large. In this respect, as in the present means C-8, by disposing the special starting means as the variable ball entry device on the downstream side of the variable winning means, the amount of ball entering the variable winning means toward the special starting means The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

  Means C-9. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 or C-8, further comprising: rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the variable ball entry device.

  According to the means C-9, the movement direction and the movement speed of the game ball entering the variable ball entry device are provided by providing the rectifying means for adjusting the movement direction and the movement speed of the game ball before reaching the variable ball entry device Irregularity with respect to For this reason, it is possible to suppress the variation in the drop point to the shutter, that is, the start point of the gaming ball moving while being in contact with the shutter. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the variation in the initial speed of the gaming ball moving while in contact with the shutter. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect is achieved that the time for moving the game ball while contacting the shutter is made as long as possible, and the probability of entering the specified winning opening is improved.

  It should be noted that "rectifying means may guide the gaming ball to the upstream side portion of the shutter". Further, the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

Means C-10. The shutter is
A first shutter that extends back and forth at least in the closed position and can close the specified winning opening;
And a second shutter that extends longitudinally at least in the closed position, and is disposed above the first shutter at a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball from the first shutter.
The first shutter and the second shutter are simultaneously configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position,
The game ball dropped to the second shutter in the closed position moves on the second shutter, falls to the first shutter in the closed position, and moves on the first shutter.
When the first shutter and the second shutter in the closed position are displaced to the open position, gaming balls on the first shutter and the second shutter enter the specified winning opening A gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-9 characterized in that.

  According to the means C-10, the position and speed of the gaming ball falling to the first shutter can be limited to a certain extent by the second shutter, and movement of the gaming ball on the first shutter can be made suitable. . In addition, the first shutter and the second shutter are displaced to the open position not only for the game ball on the first shutter in the closed position but also for the game balls on the second shutter in the closed position. Since the player enters the specific winning combination, the effect of entering the gaming ball into the specific winning combination efficiently is more reliably exhibited.

  D. Conventionally, for example, pachinko machines and the like have been known as a type of game machine. The pachinko machine is configured to play a game using a game ball, and to have a game area in which the game ball can move, and to guide the game ball fired by the launcher to the game area. Also, in general, pachinko machines are provided with various winning means capable of entering game balls moving in the game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

  By the way, among the game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls entered in any winning means and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any prize means Relatively large variations may occur in the ratio, in which case the interest may be reduced.

  In particular, in a state where the winning means that changes between the open state where the game ball is relatively easy to enter and the closed state where the game ball can not enter the ball is frequently opened, the ball is entered into such winning means Under such circumstances, the game can be progressed basically without reducing the player's hand-held game balls, as long as the game balls are launched to the expected route, and the game is applicable under such circumstances. Even if the game ball is hit on the route of the game, if the number of game balls on hand is decreasing rapidly, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its object is to provide a gaming machine having a function capable of suppressing variation in entering a game ball into winning means. It is to do.

Means D-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
Start winning means capable of changing state to an open state permitting entry of the game ball moving in the game area and a closed state restricting entry of the game ball, and variable winning means;
Normal starting means through which game balls moving in the game area can pass;
Start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the start winning means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
And a normal start detection unit that detects a game ball passing through the normal start unit;
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a lottery for judging whether or not to generate a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened is performed.
Based on the detection of the normal start detection means, an entrance support lottery is performed to determine whether the start winning means is opened or not.
If one of the start-up winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area is in the open state, although the ball has reached an entering point at which one can enter the ball, A ball guiding means for guiding a game ball which could not enter into the one side because one is in a closed state, to a ball entry point which can enter into the other when the other is in an open state A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means D-1, the game ball which can not enter the one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means because one is closed, reaches the other entering point (entrance) It is possible to prevent the situation where the game area is discharged without any problem. As a result, the game ball that could not enter one of the start winning means and the variable winning means can surely increase the possibility of entering the other, and it is hit in the game area It is possible to suppress the situation where the game ball is discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. As a result, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls entered into any winning means and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any winning means It is possible to suppress the occurrence of relatively large variations in the ratio of, and to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the variations.

Means D-2. The variable winning means is disposed at a specific winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point through which the game ball entering into the specific winning hole passes. And a specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position for closing the winning opening and an open position for opening the specified winning opening,
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is at the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. A game machine according to the means D-1 comprising means for giving a specific ball entry opportunity to be given.

  When the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, there is no possibility that the game ball passes the ball entry point to the specific winning hole side, and there is no possibility of entering the specific winning hole. On the other hand, according to the means D-2, when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game winning ball reaching the specified winning opening is reached at a timing later than the specific winning for the game ball It is possible to give an opportunity to enter the mouth. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the entering point to the specific winning opening side and enters the specific winning opening.

  Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the entering point and entering the specific winning opening and the entering point is reached, but the opening / closing member The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning opening can be increased in the ratio of the number of gaming balls excluded to the route which is restricted to the route not entering the specific winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched for the specific winning opening, it does not reach into the ball. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls are efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby making the game Can be made to progress slightly.

  In general, when the opening and closing member is in the open position, the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the ball entry point, and when the opening and closing member is in the closed position, at timing such as reaching the ball entry point It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the specific winning opening by performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching the gaming balls. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of gaming balls fired and the total number of gaming balls paid out (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the part of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, the larger the number of players who perform the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, or the various winning openings from which game balls are paid out. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility of balls reaching and entering, and there is a risk that the burden on players who do not perform the above-mentioned technical operations may be further increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the ball entry point when the open / close member is in the closed position, the game ball may enter the specified winning hole From this, even if the game balls are kept firing, the generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  In the special game state, (almost) all of the gaming balls having reached the entry point to the specific winning combination may enter the specific winning combination. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely.

Means D-3. The start winning means is disposed at a start winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point where a game ball entering the start winning port passes A start opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position closing the winning opening and an open position opening the starting winning opening;
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the start opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the start winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. A game machine according to means D-1, comprising a starting ball entry opportunity giving means for giving.

  According to the means D-3, basically the same action and effect as the means D-2 are exhibited with the target being the start winning means. In the ball entry support state in which the start winning means is opened relatively frequently, (almost) all of the game balls that have reached the entry point to the start winning port enter the start prize opening. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely.

Means D-4. The variable winning means is disposed at a specific winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point through which the game ball entering into the specific winning hole passes. And a specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position for closing the winning opening and an open position for opening the specified winning opening,
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is at the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. It has a means for giving a specific sounding opportunity to give,
The start winning means is disposed at a start winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point where a game ball entering the start winning port passes A start opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position closing the winning opening and an open position opening the starting winning opening;
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the start opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the start winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. A game machine according to means D-1, comprising a starting ball entry opportunity giving means for giving.

  According to the means D-4, the operation and effect of the means D-2 and the means D-3 are exhibited. In addition, as described in the above means D-1, one of the start winning means and the variable winning means located upstream of the game area, the game ball that has not entered the ball is You will be guided to. That is, in a situation where the ball entry support state in which the start winning means is opened relatively frequently and the special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened are continuously derived, the game Only by striking the ball at the same position in the game area, (almost all) game balls will enter with a high probability in either of the start winning means and the variable winning means. Therefore, in the ball entry support state and the special game state, it is possible to play a very efficient game with almost no wasted balls. As a result, it is possible to play a comfortable game in the entry support state or the special game state, and the situation where the game ball does not enter the winning means easily continues to feel unpleasant (a presentation etc. Can not avoid the situation).

  Means D-5. The start winning means is located on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the variable winning means, and a game ball which has not entered the start winning means is guided to the variable winning means. The game machine as described in 2 or D-4.

  When adopting the variable winning means of means D-2 or D-4, it takes a relatively long time for the gaming ball that has reached the variable winning means in the closed state to leave the variable winning means for maintaining the closed state. It becomes. For this reason, when the start winning means is located downstream of the variable winning means via the ball entry guide means, the game ball may not reach the start winning means easily. In particular, in general, an interval when the start winning means is opened a plurality of times (a closed period during an open period) and a special gaming state in which the variable win means is opened a plurality of times Such a tendency becomes more pronounced if the special gaming state interval is longer than the interval, and the special winning opportunity giving means of the variable winning means is designed accordingly.

  In this respect, by arranging the start winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means as in the means D-5, the game ball reaches the start winning means after striking the game ball aiming at the start winning means. Can be relatively shortened, and smooth game progress can be achieved. In addition, for example, when the start winning means is on the downstream side of the variable winning means via the ball entry guide means, if the game ball reaches the variable winning means in a state in which the closed state is maintained, the start winning means Entry to the ball is almost certain, but it takes a relatively long time to actually enter the starting winning means (from that time it is detected by the starting winning means). Although there is concern that a sense of incongruity may be given, the occurrence of such incongruity can be avoided by making the start winning means upstream of the variable winning means.

  Further, even in the case of adopting the variable winning means of means D-2 or D-4, it becomes possible to cause the starting winning means to enter the game ball during the special game state. Therefore, in the special game state, almost all of the game balls that reach the ball entry point of the variable winning means enter the variable winning means, and there is almost no wasted ball (no loss of the player). If there is a payout of two or more game balls based on the entry of the game ball into the means, the one that becomes advantageous to the player (the game balls extra paid out by the amount entered into the start winning means) Can be given a slight change to

  Means D-6. The variable winning means is located on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the starting winning means, and a game ball which has not entered the variable winning means is guided to the starting winning means. The game machine as described in 2 or D-4.

  According to the means D-6, when adopting the variable winning means of the means D-2 or D-4, it is almost impossible for the game ball to enter the starting winning means during the special gaming state, so to the starting winning means The game balls will not be paid out on the basis of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the total number of payouts of the game balls in the special game state changes relatively largely depending on whether or not the game balls enter the start winning means in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to make the total number of game balls paid out in the special game state of the same type in which the variable winning means is in the open state substantially constant, and to make it easy to design the game balls paid out (payout rate) . In addition, as a gaming concept (a feature of a predetermined special gaming state), it is possible to derive a special gaming state with little variation in the number of payouts of gaming balls.

  Also, in the special game state, there is no possibility that the game ball enters the variable winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means (or if it reaches the variable winning means, it enters the variable winning means). The special gaming state can be progressed relatively smoothly and quickly.

  Incidentally, although the arrangement of the variable winning means and the starting winning means is reversed between the means D-6 and the means D-5, it is sufficient to adopt a method which fits the concept of each model. That is, for example, in "a configuration in which there is a payout of one game ball based on the entry of the game ball to the start winning means", no increase in the game ball can be expected at this, and the variable winning means is opened. In the special game state, the game ball entering the start winning means may be regarded as a waste of time, and the variable winning means may be disposed upstream as in the means D-6, or Make the special game state itself more enjoyable by prolonging the time required to digest the special game state (time to derive the effect for the special game state) as much as possible without increasing the payout rate (provision during the special game state) The start winning means may be arranged upstream as in means D-5.

  Means D-7. Of the start winning means and the variable winning means, on the upstream side of the one located on the upstream side of the game area, there is provided a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball. A gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-6.

  According to the means D-7, providing the rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball before the gaming ball reaches one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. By this, it is possible to reduce irregularity in the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball entering the one side. Therefore, the flow of gaming balls in the start winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball guiding means can be made relatively smooth.

  In particular, as for means D-2 to D-4, when the open / close member is in the closed state, the game ball is given the opportunity to reach the ball entry point at another timing, and the ball enters the winning opening The effects such as improving the probability can be further ensured. Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

  Means D-8. Of the start winning means and the variable winning means, the other one located downstream of the game area is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry guide means. A game machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that:

  According to the means D-8, it is prevented that the game ball does not pass through one of the start winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area and reaches the other located on the game area downstream side can do. Therefore, it is possible to first try to enter one of the balls, and if it is not possible to comply with the order of entering the other ball, it is possible to enter the starting winning means and the variable winning means The action and effect such as improving the sex can be more reliably achieved.

  Means D-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-8, wherein the start winning means and the variable winning means are unitized and attached to the game board.

  According to the means D-9, it is possible to improve the workability of attaching and detaching the start winning means and the variable winning means to the gaming machine, and to determine the relative position between the start winning means and the variable winning means more precisely. .

  Means D-10. A game area is provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, and at least the start winning means, the variable winning means, and a front decoration part covering the front of the ball entering guide means A game machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-9 characterized in that:

  According to the means D-10, the sense of unity of the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball entry guiding means can be enhanced. In other words, the ball entry support in which the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently without being confused by the structure of the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball guiding means, and the complicated movement of the gaming ball moving them. In the special game state where the state or variable winning means is opened, if the gaming ball reaches the part covered by the front decoration (if the game ball enters the back of the front decoration), the starting winning means Or, it can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that one of the variable winning means enters. In addition, since the portion covered by the front decoration portion is provided with the functions of both the start winning means and the variable winning means, there is only a configuration in which the starting winning means and the variable winning means are separately present. In addition to the novelty of the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to derive a new effect using the game machine.

  It should be noted that "the front decoration portion may be configured to have transparency at a portion where the game ball can pass at least the game area behind the front decoration portion". For example, at least a portion where the gaming ball passes the back side, it may be made of a transparent or translucent material, or a slit may be formed. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation where a player or the like who is playing a game for the first time becomes uneasy because he or she does not see what is happening behind the front decoration part. Also, for example, the front decoration may be used as a place for teaching the player predetermined information. For example, the front decoration unit may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning lottery, etc.). In addition, the front decoration portion, part of the start winning means and the variable winning means (for example, the front wall of the ball receiving portion that receives the game ball moving in the game area and guides it to the opening formed in the game board ) May be configured.

Means D-11. In the ball entry support lottery, a low ball entry state winning with a first probability and a high ball entry state winning with a higher probability than the first probability are set,
In the installation range of the front decoration portion, the state corresponding to the high ball entry corresponding state corresponding to the high ball entry state, the special game corresponding state corresponding to the special game state, and the normal corresponding state corresponding to other states A game machine according to means D-10, characterized by comprising changeable state indication means.

  According to the means D-11, even if the front decoration part is kept visible, whether the gaming ball enters the starting winning means or the variable winning means or both of them depending on the state of the state indication means It can be grasped whether it is in the state where it can not enter the ball.

  Means D-12. The front decoration portion is characterized by including an entrance benefit at a position corresponding to an entering path of the game ball to one of the start winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. The game machine according to D-10 or D-11.

  According to the means D-12, since the entrance character serves as a mark of where to move the game ball, it is possible to help the player to understand the game characteristics.

  Means D-13. The gaming machine according to the means D-12, further comprising an item driving means capable of changing a state of the inlet character and changing a visual recognition mode of the inlet character.

  According to the means D-13, the decorativeness and the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by changing the state of the entrance character, it is possible to make it more noticeable as a mark of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest and teach predetermined information by the state change.

  In addition, with "change in the state of the entrance character", it means the displacement of the entrance character, the aspect change of the display member such as the electric decoration provided in the entrance character (for example, the entrance character imitates a predetermined character and The three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes according to the situation, and the like. In addition, as the displacement of the entrance character, not only when the entire entrance character is displaceable, but also the entrance character is displaceable partially (one or more may be possible). The case is included.

Means D-14. The inlet part is at least partially displaceable,
The gaming machine according to the means D-13, wherein the movement path of the game balls in the game area is not changed even if the entrance character is displaced.

  According to the means D-14, the entrance character is a character (decoration) and is configured displaceable, but the displacement does not affect the movement path of the gaming ball. For this reason, even if the entrance character is moved in a complicated manner, etc., it is possible to well enter the gaming ball into the starting winning means and the variable winning means, and also an entrance role which can be designed relatively freely. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the object.

  Note that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet character". In this case, it is possible to avoid the increase in size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring so as not to change the movement path of the gaming ball with displacement of the entrance accessory. In addition, “the start-up drive means for changing the state of the start-up winning means into the open state and the closed state, and the variable drive means to change the state of the variable winning means into the open state and the closed state; In conjunction with the opening and closing operation of one of the start winning means and the variable winning means, the accessory driving means may be configured by the start driving means or the variable driving means. In this case, the displacement control of the entrance part can be simplified.

Means D-15. In the ball entry support lottery, a low ball entry state winning with a first probability and a high ball entry state winning with a higher probability than the first probability are set,
The entry role can be changed into a high entry ball support state corresponding to the high entry ball state, a special game support state corresponding to the special game state, and a normal support state corresponding to other states. A game machine according to any one of the means D-12 to D-14 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to means D-15, depending on the aspect of the entrance character, it is grasped which of the starting winning means and the variable winning means the game ball is in the state of entering the ball or the state in which both can not enter the ball. can do. In addition, corresponding to the above-mentioned means D-11, a "state indication means" will be constituted by entrance goods.

Means D-16. The front decoration portion is attached to the game board or the start winning means and the variable winning means attached to the game board,
A means D-10 is characterized in that the front decoration part is formed with a nail exposure hole which penetrates back and forth and exposes the game nail set up on the front side of the game board to the front. The gaming machine according to any one of D-15.

  According to the means D-16, in order to attach the front decoration part, it is not necessary to change the shapes of the game board attachment frame to which the game board is attached and the front frame provided in front of the game board attachment frame. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the gaming machine, such as exchanging only the gaming board and various members attached thereto, and reusing the gaming board attachment frame and the like as it is.

  In addition, by forming a nail exposure hole in the front decoration portion, the front decoration portion is relatively widely provided without providing a game nail in the vicinity of the start winning means and the variable winning means, and without regard to the arrangement of the game nails. (The outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion can be provided as far as possible from the start winning means and the variable winning means). In addition, since it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion so as to avoid the game nail, it is possible to achieve both improvement in design of the front decoration portion and formation of a movement route of the game ball by the game nail. Can. In addition, even when maintenance (angle adjustment etc.) of the game nail is required due to changes in the angle of the game nail due to long years of use, etc., such work can be performed without removing the front decoration part.

  In addition, as for the positional relationship between the front decoration part and the game nail, if the game ball is configured to be able to pass between the front decoration part and the game board, the front part of the game nail penetrates the nail exposure hole It may be located in front of a front decoration part, and the whole game nail may be located behind the front decoration part. In addition, it may be considered as "a ball clogging eliminating hole is formed in the front decoration portion corresponding to the path of the game ball and which penetrates back and forth". In this case, even if ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decoration part, it can be eliminated without removing the front decoration part via the ball clogging elimination hole. Moreover, the visibility of the game ball which passes the back side of a front decoration part can be improved.

  Note that "the front decoration part may be attached to the start winning means and the variable winning means attached to the game board". That is, when the front decoration part is directly attached to the game board with a screw etc., basically there is concern that the screw etc. will be exposed to the front and cause deterioration of the designability, but the front decoration part will start winning prize means and By attaching to the variable winning means, such attachment can be performed on the back surface side of the front decorative portion so that a screw or the like used for attachment can not be visually recognized. However, when adopting such a configuration, it is feared that the task of attaching the start winning means and the variable winning means to the game board becomes relatively difficult. That is, in the case where the front decoration portion also covers the front of the mounting portion of the start winning means and the variable winning means on the game board, a tool such as a driver can not be suitably positioned in front of the mounting portion. On the other hand, "the front decoration part is formed with a tool hole which penetrates back and forth and exposes the attachment portion of the start winning means and the variable winning means to the game board forwardly" It may be In this case, even if the front decoration part covers the front of the start winning means and the variable winning means, the work of attaching the starting winning means and the variable winning means to the game board can be performed relatively easily. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the design due to visual recognition from the front of the installation site of the part and the installation site of the start winning means and the variable winning means.

  Means D-17. With respect to the area covered forward by the front decoration part, an entry path of the game ball which ensures that the one of the ball entry points located upstream of the game area among the start winning means and the variable winning means is reached The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-10 to D-16, further comprising a tip detection means for detecting a passing game ball.

  According to the means D-17, it is possible to relatively quickly generate a reaction to the game ball entering the area covered by the front decoration, in which case the game ball is present in the area where the front decoration is present. I can strengthen the image that I entered the ball. Therefore, the area where the front decoration portion exists can be more reliably recognized as a winning area in which the start winning means and the variable winning means are combined.

  Furthermore, until the gaming ball is detected by the start winning detection means or the variable winning detection means (in particular, one located on the downstream side of the gaming area) after the gaming ball enters the area where the front decoration portion is present, There is a concern that a relatively long time lag will occur, and even if the notification of entering the ball is made at the timing of detection by the start winning detection means or the variable winning detection means (the game ball has entered the area where the front decoration exists) It becomes difficult to know what the notification corresponds to, and the player feels uneasy if there is no response when entering the front decoration. This concern can be eliminated by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the front detection means.

  Also, in the case where there are a plurality of moving routes of the game ball in the game area, and the player aims to move the target game route according to the situation such as the game mode, the start winning means or In a situation where the moving route in which the variable winning means is installed is not the target moving route, it can be more reliably grasped that the game ball has been hit to the moving route, and based on this, the correct moving It is also possible to perform notification etc. which show a route.

  Means D-18. The gaming machine according to the means D-17, further comprising: an entry effect sound generation means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the first detection means.

  According to measure D-18, it is possible to further intensify the image that the gaming ball has entered the area where the front decoration part is present. In addition, the player can feel a sense of security because it can be understood that the gaming ball that has entered the back side of the front decoration portion is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side. It should be noted that teaching of whether the gaming ball enters the start winning means or the variable winning means or not can not be entered by the sound mode by the entering sound effect generating means. It is possible.

  Means D-19. A means D-- characterized by comprising discharge detection means for detecting a game ball which has not entered any of the start winning means and the variable winning means among the game balls detected by the destination detection means. The gaming machine according to 17 or D-18.

  According to the means D-19, based on detection information of the first detecting means, the start winning detecting means, the variable winning detecting means, and the discharge detecting means, there are no incorrect entering balls, the starting winning means, the variable winning means, And, it can be checked whether ball clogging has occurred in the ball entry guide means.

Means D-20. A launch strength adjusting means capable of adjusting the strength of launching the game ball by the launch means;
The game area is
The first route where the first feature is installed,
And a second route in which a second item is installed,
The game ball moving on the first route is configured to be unable to reach the second feature,
The game ball moving on the second route is configured to be unable to reach the first feature,
The launch strength adjustment means is configured to be operable by the player, and includes an operation unit that is displaced in accordance with the operation of the player.
By displacing the operation unit along a specific direction, it is possible to adjust the launch strength of the game ball by the launch means, and adjust the launch strength to adjust the game ball to the first route, It is configured to be able to strike against the second route,
The start winning means includes at least a first start winning means capable of entering game balls having passed through at least the first route, and a second start winning means as the second prize provided on the second route. Equipped
The variable winning means is a first variable winning means capable of entering a game ball having passed through at least the first route, and to be a target of a winning lottery based on entering the first start winning means; And second variable winning means as the second feature that is provided for the second route and is subject to a lottery for winning or losing based on entering the second starting winning means,
The normal starting means is provided on the second route, and the second normal starting means as the second prize in which the ball entry support lottery for the second starting winning means is performed based on the passage of game balls Equipped with
The ball entering guide means is provided to guide the movement of the gaming ball between the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means. Means D-1 to D The gaming machine according to any one of -18.

  According to the means D-20, the ball guiding means is provided between the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means, and as described in the above means 1 etc., the gaming ball is more efficient. It is possible to cause the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means to enter. However, in this configuration, although the effect of suppressing generation of wasted balls and enabling smooth (promptly) progressing of the game is exhibited, as the behavior of the game balls of the second route, the second Once one of the starting winning means and the second variable winning means reaches the ball entry point located on the upstream side, a similar moving route will be followed.

  In this respect, like the present means D-20, not only the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means, but also the first starting winning means and the first variable winning means which can be reached from the first route are provided. , You can let me choose the colorful behavior (moving route) of the game ball about here. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a decrease in interest or the like is caused due to the behavior of the gaming ball becoming substantially constant, and in the state of launching the gaming ball on the first route, enjoy the behavior of the gaming ball It is possible to maintain the original fun of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, even if entering the second start winning means or the second variable winning means can be expected by making the game ball launch on the second route when it becomes advantageous to the player, It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball does not enter the second starting winning means or the second variable winning means well. Therefore, in a state where the gaming ball is launched to the second route, it is possible to eliminate the stress that the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning means or the second variable winning means, and to proceed with the game comfortably.

  Next, embodiments of the starting ball entry opportunity providing means and the specific ball entry opportunity applying means described in the above means D-2 to D-4 will be described.

  Means D-21. The ball entry opportunity giving means (specific ball entry opportunity giving means, starting ball entry opportunity giving means) is the opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, start opening / closing member in the closed position (although it has reached the ball entry point) And the introduction path along which the game ball whose passage to the side of the winning hole (specific winning hole, starting winning hole) is restricted is guided by the A game machine including the description of any one of the means D-2 to D-4, comprising: a re-entry path for guiding the user.

  According to measure D-21, the game ball has reached the ball entry point, but since the open / close member is not yet in the open position, it will go to the ball entry point again after squeezing for a while A series of motions of the gaming ball can be derived. That is, the opening and closing member was at the closed position when the game ball first reached the ball entry point, but at a timing when the game ball reached the ball entry point again after a predetermined time via the ball entry opportunity giving means, The opening and closing member may be in the open position. Therefore, even if the attempt to pass the first entry point fails, the same gaming ball can access the entry point multiple times so that it can be retried later so that the entry to the winning opening can be made. The above-described operation and effect of ensuring that the game ball launched into the game area is efficiently entered into the winning opening is surely achieved. As a matter of course, if the opening and closing member is in the open position when the game ball first reaches the ball entry point, the game ball will enter the winning opening at that stage.

  Means D-22. The gaming machine according to the means D-21, wherein the gaming ball having reached the ball entry point is guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member in the closed position.

  According to the means D-22, when the opening and closing member for opening and closing the route to the winning opening is at the closed position, the game ball can be guided to the introduction path by the opening and closing member, so the game ball is introduced to the introduction path There is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, and suppression of cost increase can be achieved. In this means, the opening and closing member in the closed position constitutes a part of the ball entering opportunity giving means.

  Note that “the opening and closing member may be configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position projecting into the game area and an open position exiting from the game area”. In this case, the game ball can be made to enter the winning opening by the operation of dropping the game ball, and the game ball can be reliably guided by the upper surface of the opening / closing member in the closed position.

  Means D-23. The re-entry route of the game ball from the ball entry point to the introduction path and the re-entry path to the ball entry point again does not intersect at least other than the ball entry point The gaming machine according to any one of Means D-21 or D-22.

  According to the means D-23, it is possible to prevent the game balls from head-on collision on the way of the re-entry route. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably guide the game ball moving on the re-entry route to the ball entry point at the initial timing. In addition, even if the game balls collide with each other at the ball entry point, if the open / close member is in the open position, the ball entry point is passed to the winning opening side as it is.

Means D-24. When the opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, start opening / closing member) is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry to the winning opening (specific winning opening, start winning opening) is restricted by the opening / closing member is the opening / closing It is configured to move along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member while maintaining the contact state with the member,
The opening and closing member is constituted by the ball entering opportunity giving means (specific ball entering opportunity giving means, starting ball entering opportunity giving means),
Means D-2 to D- characterized in that when the opening and closing member is in the open position, the game ball in contact with the opening and closing member is configured to enter the winning opening. A gaming machine including one of the four statements.

  According to the means D-24, when the opening and closing member is in the closed position, the game ball having reached the ball entry point is restricted from entering the winning opening by the opening and closing member, but the ball to the opening and closing member is It will move along the longitudinal direction of an opening-and-closing member, maintaining a contact state. Then, when the opening and closing member is in the open position, the gaming ball which has been in contact with the opening and closing member (is leaning or resting) passes the entry point to the winning opening side, and the winning opening is It will hit the ball. In this way, by lengthening the stay time of the game ball at the ball entry point as much as possible, it is possible to enter the winning opening if the open / close member is in the open position, and wait for the timing when the open / close member is next open position Can. Therefore, the above-described operation and effect such as efficiently entering the winning opening with the game ball fired in the game area in order to cause the winning opening to enter is reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, even if the opening time at which the opening and closing member is at the open position is relatively short, it is possible to cause the winning opening to enter the game ball which is leaning (for example, mounted) on the opening and closing member. That is, for example, when the opening and closing member is closed, the gaming ball can be placed on the opening and closing member, and all of them can be made to enter the winning opening by the short opening of the opening and closing member. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without lengthening the total opening time of the opening and closing member. For this reason, for example, when the winning opening and the opening and closing member are embodied as variable winning means which is opened when winning in a lottery for winning and becoming a special gaming state, the opening and closing member accumulated in the interval between rounds The game ball enters the variable winning means (specific winning hole) at the start of the round, and time efficiency can be improved. Also, for example, when embodied in the start winning means opened when winning in the entry support lottery, it becomes feasible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time, Can also create new playability.

  Means D-25. When the opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, start opening / closing member) is at the open position, the winning opening (specific winning opening, When the opening and closing member is in the closed position when the game ball reaches the first ball entry point where it is possible to enter the starting winning opening), the winning is achieved if the opening and closing member is the open position A gaming machine including the description of any one of the means D-2 to D-4, which guides to a second ball entry point capable of entering the mouth.

  According to the means D-25, when the opening and closing member is in the closed position, if the opening and closing member is in the open position, the gaming ball has reached the first ball entry point where it can enter the winning opening Also, the game ball is guided to the second ball entry point where the player can enter the winning opening when the opening and closing member is in the open position. Therefore, an opportunity to try to enter the winning opening will be given again to the gaming ball that could not enter the winning opening, and the possibility of the gaming ball entering the winning opening can be enhanced. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the winning opening, the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the winning opening to the number of gaming balls not entering the winning opening is the winning opening It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of game balls entering the game.

Means D-26. The winning opening (specific winning opening, starting winning opening) includes a first winning opening and a second winning opening.
The opening and closing member (specific opening and closing member, start opening and closing member) is
A game ball entering the first winning opening is disposed at a first entering point on a first entering route where a game ball entering (always) will pass, and the entering of the game ball to the first winning opening is not achieved. A first opening and closing member displaceable between a closed position enabling the ball and an open position permitting the ball to enter;
A game ball entering the second winning opening is disposed at a second entering point on a second entering route where the game ball enters (must pass), and the entering of the game ball to the second winning opening is not achieved. And a second opening / closing member displaceable between the closed position enabling the movement and the open position enabling the insertion of the ball;
When the first opening / closing member is in the closed position (the first opening / closing member is in the closed position) As a result, the game ball which can not pass the first ball entry point to the first winning hole side is guided to the second ball entry route. Means D-2 to D- A gaming machine including one of the four statements.

  According to the means D-26, when the first opening and closing member is in the closing position, the first entry point is on the side of the first winning opening due to the fact that the first opening and closing member is in the closing position. The game ball which can not pass through is guided to the second entering route leading to the second winning opening. Therefore, the game ball that could not enter the first winning opening will be given the opportunity to try to enter the second winning opening, and the gaming ball will receive the winning opening (the first winning opening and the second winning). Can increase the possibility of entering the mouth). Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the entering point and entering the winning opening and the entering point is reached, but the opening and closing member is restricted It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the winning opening in the ratio of the number of gaming balls being eliminated to the route that does not enter the winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the winning opening can be efficiently entered into the winning opening, and the wasted ball that was launched to aim at the winning opening but did not reach the entry. As a result, it is possible to reduce the situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to make the winning opening enter the ball.

  Means D-27. The second ball entry point (corresponding to the means D-25, the second ball entry route) is configured to be enterable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry opportunity giving means A game machine according to any one of means D-25 or D-26.

  A game ball that could not enter the (first) winning opening at the first entry point may enter the (second) winning opening at the second entry point, but at the second entry point ( Second) Since there is no possibility that the game ball that could not enter the winning opening enters the first opening at the first entry point, for example, the game ball is not directly entered through the entering opportunity giving means. In the case where the game ball can enter the (second) winning opening at the second entry point, the possibility of the game ball entering the winning opening is reduced. In this respect, according to the means D-27, if the player first attempts to enter the (first) winning opening at the first entry point and if it is not good, the (second) entry is won at the second entry point. It is possible to comply with the order of entering the mouth, and the effect of improving the possibility of entering the winning opening is more surely exhibited.

  E. Conventionally, for example, pachinko machines and the like have been known as a type of game machine. A pachinko machine is provided with a game board, and in front of it, a game area where a game ball fired by a launch device is guided is formed. In addition, on the front side of the game board, game nails that make the behavior of the game ball moving the game area colorful, winning means that the game ball moving the game area can enter, suggestion of the game state, etc. A display means for effecting is provided, and a portion of the front side of the gaming machine visible to the player, including the front side of the gaming board, is provided with a large number of electric ornaments in order to improve decoration and the like. The member, the decorative member etc. which were given various designs are provided (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-271480 etc.).

  In recent years, the number and size of winning means and display means arranged on the front of the game board tend to increase and increase, and as a result, the game area in which the game ball moves tends to decrease. In other words, if the area of the game area where the game ball can move is increased, the area where the winning means and the display means can be installed is reduced by that amount, and there is a concern that it may be overlooked as compared with other models. For this reason, when trying to secure a minimum movable area of the game ball while suppressing "unsightly", it becomes difficult for all the models to have a similar board configuration and to bring out the originality.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a highly creative visual aspect.

Means E-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game board in which a plurality of game nails are set up on the front side,
And a transparent substantially plate-like transparent body disposed at a predetermined distance in front of the game board,
A gaming machine, in which a gaming area is formed between the gaming board and the transparent body, to which a gaming ball fired by the firing means is guided,
It has a front decoration part provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass between the game board and the game board in the game area, and configured to allow the game balls moving behind itself to be visible from the front,
The front decoration portion is attached to the game board or a game member attached to the game board,
A gaming machine characterized in that the front decoration portion is formed with a nail exposure hole which penetrates back and forth and exposes the game nail set up on the front side of the gaming board to the front.

  According to the means E-1, the front decoration portion which can show the predetermined information (such as decoration) to the player in front of the portion through which the game ball can pass in the game area, the range in which the game nail is installed Also, the area of the front decoration part can be secured to a certain extent without regard to the arrangement of the game nails. For this reason, information that has conventionally been placed in a place that is difficult for the player to view, or information that has difficulty in securing a space and has been limited in installation, is placed within the range of the game area in which the game ball moves. be able to. In particular, since the front decoration portion is located in front of the portion through which the game ball of the game area passes, the front of the game board, around the game area, and the game machine main body to which the game board is attached In addition to the front face of the door which is provided so as to be openable and closable in front of the three-dimensional decoration and the like, it is possible to perform expression of motif across the inner peripheral side and outer peripheral side of the game area.

  Furthermore, the front decoration portion is attached to a game board or a game member attached to the game board. For this reason, in order to attach the front decoration part, it is not necessary to change the shapes of the game board attachment frame to which the game board is attached and the front frame provided in front of the game board attachment frame. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the gaming machine, such as exchanging only the gaming board and various members attached thereto, and reusing the gaming board attachment frame and the like as it is.

  Further, the game area in the rear of the front decoration portion is configured so that the game balls can move, and the game balls moving in the area can be viewed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the situation where the area where the gaming ball can move (when the gaming board is viewed from the front) is narrowed in exchange for the front decoration section being installed. Furthermore, the front decoration portion is formed with a nail exposure hole for exposing the game nail forward. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball can move behind the front decoration but the game nail can not be installed. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration part so as to avoid the game nail (it is not necessary to arrange the game nail so as to avoid the front decoration part). And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail can be compatible.

In addition, even when maintenance (angle adjustment etc.) of the game nail is required due to changes in the angle of the game nail due to long years of use, etc., such work can be performed without removing the front decoration part. Furthermore, for example, the durability can be improved as compared to the case where a resin rod-like body integrally formed on the front decoration portion is provided instead of the game nail, in addition to the front decoration. It is not necessary to extend the distance between the game board and the transparent body in order to install the unit, and while changing the basic design of the gaming machine, the front and back width of the gaming machine is expanded (in the game hall etc. If the installation space of the gaming machine is determined and the front and rear width increases, there is a risk that the front of the gaming machine may come close to the player in front, making it difficult to overlook the entire gaming area. it can.

  In addition, since the front decoration part is provided at a position where it can not be contacted from the player side behind the transparent body, the front decoration part may be damaged by external contact, or the game machine may be detached from the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the situation where it does. In addition, even if the front decoration part prints information on the front side or inside (sticks a printed sticker) or processes the front side or inside (concave and convex), information may be attached. Good. In this case, even if a game ball moving in the game area comes in contact with the front decoration portion, it is possible to suppress a situation where information is cut off and it becomes difficult to see.

  In addition, as for the positional relationship between the front decoration part and the game nail, if the game ball is configured to be able to pass between the front decoration part and the game board, the front part of the game nail penetrates the nail exposure hole It may be located in front of a front decoration part, and the whole game nail may be located behind the front decoration part. In addition, the front decoration part may have information (model information, copyright holder, etc.) represented by symbol information such as letters and numbers, and for example, it may be processed to be uneven, or a pattern may be drawn, You may have information (decoration, a background, etc.) represented by giving coloring. In addition, “a game nail arranged to face forward from the nail exposure hole may be the same nail as the other game nails”. In this case, it is possible to unify the gaming nails, and to improve the productivity of the gaming machine and reduce the cost. In addition, it is not necessary to have transparency for the part of the front decoration part where the gaming ball can not pass the back side. In addition, in order to have transparency, for example, at least a portion where the gaming ball passes the back side may be made of a transparent or translucent material, or a slit may be formed. In addition, the front decoration portion, part of the start winning means and the variable winning means (for example, the front wall of the ball receiving portion that receives the game ball moving in the game area and guides it to the opening formed in the game board ) May be configured.

  Means E-2. In the front decoration portion, a ball clogging eliminating hole penetrating back and forth is formed corresponding to a game ball path through which a game ball can pass behind, the game described in the means E-1 Machine.

  According to the means E-2, even if ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decoration part, it becomes possible to eliminate it through the ball clogging elimination hole without removing the front decoration part. Moreover, the visibility of the game ball which passes the back side of a front decoration part can be improved.

Means E-3. The front decoration portion is attached to a game member attached to the game board,
Means E-1 or E-2 characterized in that the front decoration portion is formed with a tool hole which penetrates back and forth and exposes a mounting site of the gaming member to the gaming board forward. The gaming machine described in.

  If the front decoration is directly attached to the game board with screws etc., there is a concern that basically the screws etc. will be exposed to the front and cause deterioration of the design, but the front decoration is attached to the game member By doing this, such attachment can be performed on the back surface side of the front decorative portion so that a screw or the like used for attachment can not be visually recognized. However, when such a configuration is adopted, it is feared that the task of attaching the gaming member to the gaming board will be relatively difficult. That is, in the case where the front decoration portion also covers the front of the attachment portion of the game member to the game board, a tool such as a driver can not be suitably positioned in front of the attachment portion.

  On the other hand, according to the means E-3, the tool hole is formed in the part located in front of the attachment part to the game board of the game member among the front decoration part. In this case, even if the front decoration part covers the front of the game member, the mounting work of the game member on the game board can be performed relatively easily, and further, the mounting part of the front decoration part and the mounting of the game member It can be reduced that the designability is reduced due to the site being viewed from the front.

  When the front decorative portion is attached to the game member by the locking means, there is a concern that the disassembling work becomes relatively difficult. Further, in the case where the attachment portion of the game member to the game board is positioned outside the installation range of the front decoration portion, there is a possibility that the designability may be reduced. For this reason, it is desirable to attach the game member to which the front decoration part is attached to a game board using attachment members, such as a screw, by providing a tool hole in the front decoration part like this means.

  Means E-4. The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-3, wherein the front decoration part is separated from the transparent body.

  According to the means E-4, the generation of abnormal noise and the like caused by the transmission of the vibration of the front decoration to the transparent body can be prevented, and the front decoration and the transparent body can be in pressure contact with each other As a result, it is possible to prevent the front decorative part from being damaged or the like.

  Means E-5. The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-4, wherein the front decoration part is configured to cover the front of a plurality of winning means.

  According to the means E-5, it is possible to perform dynamic decoration and the like over a wider range.

  Means E-6. In the installation range of the front decoration portion, it is possible to individually distinguish the winning means that has entered the ball that the game ball has entered the plurality of winning means whose front is covered by the front decoration portion. A game machine according to the means E-5, characterized in that it comprises a ball entry teaching means capable of teaching in a comfortable manner.

  According to the means E-6, it is possible to more clearly grasp where the game ball has entered the ball among the plurality of winning means whose front is covered with the front decoration portion by the ball entering teaching means.

  Means E-7. In a state where it is possible to enter the winning means whose front is covered by the front decoration part, the game ball necessarily enters any area by the game ball entering the area covered by the front decoration part. A game machine according to the means E-5 or E-6, characterized in that the player wins the prize.

  According to the means E-7, if it is practically possible to launch the game ball in the area covered with the front by the front decoration (if there is no profit or loss to the player even if aiming), the front decoration may be used. It is possible to add a playability such as striking the game ball in an area where the front is covered.

  Means E-8. The gaming machine according to the means E-7, wherein the entrance offering is provided at a position where the gaming ball can enter into the area covered with the front by the front decoration part.

  According to the means E-8, since the entrance character serves as a mark indicating where to move the game ball, it is possible to help the player to understand the game characteristics.

  Means E-9. The gaming machine according to the means E-8, further comprising an item driving means capable of changing the state of the entrance character.

  According to the means E-9, the decorativeness and the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by changing the state of the entrance character, it is possible to make it more noticeable as a mark of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest and teach predetermined information by the state change.

  In addition, with "change in the state of the entrance character", it means the displacement of the entrance character, the aspect change of the display member such as the electric decoration provided in the entrance character (for example, the entrance character imitates a predetermined character and The three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes according to the situation, and the like. In addition, as the displacement of the entrance character, not only when the entire entrance character is displaceable, but also the entrance character is displaceable partially (one or more may be possible). The case is included.

Means E-10. The inlet part is at least partially displaceable,
The gaming machine according to the means E-9, wherein the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area is not changed even if the entrance character is displaced.

  According to the means E-10, the entrance character is a character (ornament) and is displaceable, but the displacement does not affect the movement path of the gaming ball. For this reason, even if the entrance character is moved in a complicated manner, etc., it is possible to well enter the gaming ball into the winning means on the back side of the front decoration part, and it is also possible to design the entrance ball relatively freely. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the object.

  Note that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet character". In this case, it is possible to avoid the increase in size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring so as not to change the movement path of the gaming ball with displacement of the entrance accessory.

Means E-11. Start winning means capable of changing state to an open state permitting entry of the game ball moving in the game area and a closed state restricting entry of the game ball, and variable winning means;
Normal starting means through which game balls moving in the game area can pass;
Start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the start winning means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
And a normal start detection unit that detects a game ball passing through the normal start unit;
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a lottery for judging whether or not to generate a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened is performed.
Based on the detection of the normal start detection means, an entrance support lottery is performed to determine whether the start winning means is opened or not.
If one of the start-up winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area is in the open state, although the ball has reached an entering point at which one can enter the ball, A ball guiding means for guiding a game ball which could not enter into the one side because one is in a closed state, to a ball entry point which can enter into the other when the other is in an open state Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-10, wherein the front decoration part covers at least the start winning means, the variable winning means, and the front of the ball guiding means.

  According to the means E-11, the game ball which can not enter the one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means because one is closed, reaches the other entering point (entrance) It is possible to prevent the situation where the game area is discharged without any problem. As a result, the game ball that could not enter one of the start winning means and the variable winning means can surely increase the possibility of entering the other, and it is hit in the game area It is possible to suppress the situation where the game ball is discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. As a result, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls entered into any winning means and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any winning means It is possible to suppress the occurrence of relatively large variations in the ratio of, and to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the variations.

  In addition, the presence of the front decoration portion can enhance the sense of unity of the start winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball guiding means. In other words, the ball entry support in which the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently without being confused by the structure of the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball guiding means, and the complicated movement of the gaming ball moving them. In the special game state where the state or variable winning means is opened, if the gaming ball reaches the part covered by the front decoration (if the game ball enters the back of the front decoration), the starting winning means Or, it can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that one of the variable winning means enters. In addition, since the portion covered by the front decoration portion is provided with the functions of both the start winning means and the variable winning means, there is only a configuration in which the starting winning means and the variable winning means are separately present. In addition to the novelty of the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to derive a new effect using the game machine.

  Means E-12. The front decoration portion is characterized by including an entrance benefit at a position corresponding to an entering path of the game ball to one of the start winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. The game machine according to E-11.

  According to the means E-12, since the entrance character serves as a mark of where to move the game ball, it is possible to help the player to understand the game characteristics.

  Means E-13. A game machine according to means E-12, characterized in that it comprises an item driving means capable of changing the state of the entrance character.

  According to the means E-13, the decorativeness and the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by changing the state of the entrance character, it is possible to make it more noticeable as a mark of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest and teach predetermined information by the state change.

  In addition, with "change in the state of the entrance character", it means the displacement of the entrance character, the aspect change of the display member such as the electric decoration provided in the entrance character (for example, the entrance character imitates a predetermined character and The three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes according to the situation, and the like. In addition, as the displacement of the entrance character, not only when the entire entrance character is displaceable, but also the entrance character is displaceable partially (one or more may be possible). The case is included.

Means E-14. The inlet part is at least partially displaceable,
The gaming machine according to the means E-13, wherein the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area is not changed even if the entrance character is displaced.

  According to the means E-14, the entrance character is a character (decoration) and is displaceable, but the displacement does not affect the moving path of the gaming ball. For this reason, even if the entrance character is moved in a complicated manner, etc., it is possible to well enter the gaming ball into the starting winning means and the variable winning means, and also an entrance role which can be designed relatively freely. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the object.

  Note that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet character". In this case, it is possible to avoid the increase in size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring so as not to change the movement path of the gaming ball with displacement of the entrance accessory. In addition, “the start-up drive means for changing the state of the start-up winning means into the open state and the closed state, and the variable drive means to change the state of the variable winning means into the open state and the closed state; In conjunction with the opening and closing operation of one of the start winning means and the variable winning means, the accessory driving means may be configured by the start driving means or the variable driving means. In this case, the displacement control of the entrance part can be simplified.

Means E-15. In the ball entry support lottery, a low ball entry state winning with a first probability and a high ball entry state winning with a higher probability than the first probability are set,
The entry role can be changed into a high entry ball support state corresponding to the high entry ball state, a special game support state corresponding to the special game state, and a normal support state corresponding to other states. The gaming machine according to means E-13 or E-14, characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the means E-15, depending on the aspect of the entrance character, it is grasped which of the starting winning means and the variable winning means the game ball is in the state of entering the ball or the state in which both can not enter the ball. can do.

  Means E-16. With respect to the area covered forward by the front decoration part, an entry path of the game ball which ensures that the one of the ball entry points located upstream of the game area among the start winning means and the variable winning means is reached The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-11 to E-15, further comprising a tip detection means for detecting a passing game ball.

  According to the means E-16, it is possible to relatively quickly generate a reaction to the game ball entering the area covered by the front decoration, in which case the game ball is present in the area where the front decoration is present. I can strengthen the image that I entered the ball. Therefore, the area where the front decoration portion exists can be more reliably recognized as a winning area in which the start winning means and the variable winning means are combined.

  Furthermore, until the gaming ball is detected by the start winning detection means or the variable winning detection means (in particular, one located on the downstream side of the gaming area) after the gaming ball enters the area where the front decoration portion is present, There is a concern that a relatively long time lag will occur, and even if the notification of entering the ball is made at the timing of detection by the start winning detection means or the variable winning detection means (the game ball has entered the area where the front decoration exists) It becomes difficult to know what the notification corresponds to, and the player feels uneasy if there is no response when entering the front decoration. This concern can be eliminated by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the front detection means.

  Also, in the case where there are a plurality of moving routes of the game ball in the game area, and the player aims to move the target game route according to the situation such as the game mode, the start winning means or In a situation where the moving route in which the variable winning means is installed is not the target moving route, it can be more reliably grasped that the game ball has been hit to the moving route, and based on this, the correct moving It is also possible to perform notification etc. indicating the route.

  Means E-17. The gaming machine according to the means E-16, further comprising: an entry effect sound generation means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the first detection means.

  According to the means E-17, it is possible to further strengthen the image that the gaming ball has entered the area where the front decoration part is present. In addition, the player can feel a sense of security because it can be understood that the gaming ball that has entered the back side of the front decoration portion is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side. In addition, grasping whether the gaming ball is in the state of entering the starting winning means or the variable winning means, or in the state in which both can not enter, by the sound mode by the entering sound effect generating means. It is possible.

  Means E-18. Means E-- characterized by comprising discharge detection means for detecting a game ball which has not entered any of the start winning means and the variable winning means among the game balls detected by the destination detecting means. The gaming machine according to 16 or E-17.

  According to the means E-18, based on the detection information of the first detecting means, the start winning detecting means, the variable winning detecting means, and the discharge detecting means, there is no incorrect entering, or the starting winning means, the variable winning means, And, it can be checked whether ball clogging has occurred in the ball entry guide means.

  Means E-19. Of the start winning means and the variable winning means, on the upstream side of the one located on the upstream side of the game area, there is provided a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball. A game machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-18.

  According to the means E-19, there is provided the rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball before the gaming ball reaches one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. By this, it is possible to reduce irregularity in the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball entering the one side. Therefore, the flow of gaming balls in the start winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball guiding means can be made relatively smooth. Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

  Means E-20. Of the start winning means and the variable winning means, the other one located downstream of the game area is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry guide means. A game machine according to any one of the means E-11 to E-19 characterized by the above.

  According to the means E-20, it is prevented that the game ball does not pass through one of the start winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area and reaches the other located on the game area downstream side can do. Therefore, it is possible to first try to enter one of the balls, and if it is not possible to comply with the order of entering the other ball, it is possible to enter the starting winning means and the variable winning means The action and effect such as improving the sex can be more reliably achieved.

  Means E-21. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-20, characterized in that the start winning means and the variable winning means are unitized.

  According to the means E-21, it is possible to improve the workability of attaching and detaching the start winning means and the variable winning means to the gaming machine, and to determine the relative position between the start winning means and the variable winning means more precisely. .

Means E-22. The variable winning means is disposed at a specific winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point through which the game ball entering into the specific winning hole passes. And a specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position for closing the winning opening and an open position for opening the specified winning opening,
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is at the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. A game machine according to any one of the means E-11 to E-21, characterized in that it comprises specific entering opportunity giving means for giving.

  When the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, there is no possibility that the game ball passes the ball entry point to the specific winning hole side, and there is no possibility of entering the specific winning hole. On the other hand, according to the means E-22, when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game winning ball reaching the specified winning opening is reached at a timing later than the specific winning for the game ball. It is possible to give an opportunity to enter the mouth. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the entering point to the specific winning opening side and enters the specific winning opening.

  Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the entering point and entering the specific winning opening and the entering point is reached, but the opening / closing member The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning opening can be increased in the ratio of the number of gaming balls excluded to the route which is restricted to the route not entering the specific winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched for the specific winning opening, it does not reach into the ball. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls are efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby making the game Can be made to progress slightly.

  In general, when the opening and closing member is in the open position, the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the ball entry point, and when the opening and closing member is in the closed position, at timing such as reaching the ball entry point It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the specific winning opening by performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching the gaming balls. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of gaming balls fired and the total number of gaming balls paid out (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the part of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, the larger the number of players who perform the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, or the various winning openings from which game balls are paid out. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility of balls reaching and entering, and there is a risk that the burden on players who do not perform the above-mentioned technical operations may be further increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the ball entry point when the open / close member is in the closed position, the game ball may enter the specified winning hole From this, even if the game balls are kept firing, the generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  In the special game state, (almost) all of the gaming balls having reached the entry point to the specific winning combination may enter the specific winning combination. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely.

Means E-23. The start winning means is disposed at a start winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point where a game ball entering the start winning port passes A start opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position closing the winning opening and an open position opening the starting winning opening;
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the start opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the start winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. A game machine according to any one of the means E-11 to E-22, characterized in that it comprises a starting entrance ball opportunity giving means for giving.

  According to the means E-23, basically the same action and effect as the means E-21 are exhibited with the target as the start winning means. In the ball entry support state in which the start winning means is opened relatively frequently, (almost) all of the game balls that have reached the entry point to the start winning port enter the start prize opening. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely.

Means E-24. The variable winning means is disposed at a specific winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point through which the game ball entering into the specific winning hole passes. And a specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position for closing the winning opening and an open position for opening the specified winning opening,
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is at the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. It has a means for giving a specific sounding opportunity to give,
The start winning means is disposed at a start winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter and the ball entering point where a game ball entering the start winning port passes A start opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position closing the winning opening and an open position opening the starting winning opening;
For the game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the start opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the start winning opening again at a timing later than that timing. A game machine according to any one of the means E-11 to E-21, characterized in that it comprises a starting ball entry opportunity giving means for giving.

  According to the means E-24, the operation and effect of the means E-22 and the means E-23 are exhibited. Further, as described in the above-mentioned means E-11, one of the start winning means and the variable winning means located upstream of the game area, the game ball which has not entered the ball is You will be guided to. That is, in a situation where the ball entry support state in which the start winning means is opened relatively frequently and the special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened are continuously derived, the game Only by striking the ball at the same position in the game area, (almost all) game balls will enter with a high probability in either of the start winning means and the variable winning means. Therefore, in the ball entry support state and the special game state, it is possible to play a very efficient game with almost no wasted balls. As a result, it is possible to play a comfortable game in the entry support state or the special game state, and the situation where the game ball does not enter the winning means easily continues to feel unpleasant (a presentation etc. Can not avoid the situation).

  Means E-25. The start winning means is located upstream of the game area with respect to the variable winning means, and a game ball which has not entered the start winning means is guided to the variable winning means. The game machine according to 22 or E-24.

  When adopting the variable winning means of means E-22 or E-24, it takes a relatively long time for the gaming ball that has reached the variable winning means in the closed state to exit the variable winning means for maintaining the closed state. It becomes. For this reason, when the start winning means is located downstream of the variable winning means via the ball entry guide means, the game ball may not reach the start winning means easily. In particular, in general, an interval when the start winning means is opened a plurality of times (a closed period during an open period) and a special gaming state in which the variable win means is opened a plurality of times Such a tendency becomes more pronounced if the special gaming state interval is longer than the interval, and the special winning opportunity giving means of the variable winning means is designed accordingly.

  In this respect, by arranging the start winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means as in the means E-25, the game ball reaches the variable winning means after hitting the game ball aiming at the variable winning means. Can be relatively shortened, and smooth game progress can be achieved. In addition, for example, when the start winning means is on the downstream side of the variable winning means via the ball entry guide means, if the game ball reaches the variable winning means in a state in which the closed state is maintained, the start winning means Entry to the ball is almost certain, but it takes a relatively long time to actually enter the starting winning means (from that time it is detected by the starting winning means). Although there is concern that a sense of incongruity may be given, the occurrence of such incongruity can be avoided by making the start winning means upstream of the variable winning means.

  Further, even in the case of adopting the variable winning means of means E-22 or E-24, it is possible to cause the starting winning means to enter the game ball during the special game state. Therefore, in the special game state, almost all of the game balls that reach the ball entry point of the variable winning means enter the variable winning means, and there is almost no wasted ball (no loss of the player). If there is a payout of two or more game balls based on the entry of the game ball into the means, the one that becomes advantageous to the player (the game balls extra paid out by the amount entered into the start winning means) Can be given a slight change to

  Means E-26. The variable winning means is positioned upstream of the game area with respect to the start winning means, and a game ball which has not entered the variable winning means is guided to the starting winning means. The game machine according to 22 or E-24.

  According to the means E-26, when adopting the variable winning means of the means E-22 or E-24, it is almost impossible for the game ball to enter the start winning means during the special game state, so to the start winning means The game balls will not be paid out on the basis of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the total number of payouts of the game balls in the special game state changes relatively largely depending on whether or not the game balls enter the start winning means in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to make the total number of game balls paid out in the special game state of the same type in which the variable winning means is in the open state substantially constant, and to make it easy to design the game balls paid out (payout rate) . In addition, as a gaming concept (a feature of a predetermined special gaming state), it is possible to derive a special gaming state with little variation in the number of payouts of gaming balls.

  Also, in the special game state, there is no possibility that the game ball enters the variable winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means (or if it reaches the variable winning means, it enters the variable winning means). The special gaming state can be progressed relatively smoothly and quickly.

  The arrangement of the variable winning means and the starting winning means are reversed between the means E-26 and the means E-25. However, it is sufficient to adopt a method which conforms to the concept of each model. That is, for example, in "a configuration in which there is a payout of one game ball based on the entry of the game ball to the start winning means", this can not be expected to increase the game ball at all, and is regarded as waste. The variable winning means may be arranged on the upstream side as in 26 or the time required for the special gaming state to be digested (the time for which the effect for the special gaming state can be derived without increasing the payout rate of the gaming ball ) May be extended as much as possible, and the special game state itself may be enjoyed more (they may be enjoyed). A start winning means may be arranged upstream as in means E-25.

  F. Conventionally, for example, pachinko machines and the like have been known as a type of game machine. The pachinko machine is configured to play a game using a game ball, and to have a game area in which the game ball can move, and to guide the game ball fired by the launcher to the game area. Also, in general, pachinko machines are provided with various winning means capable of entering game balls moving in the game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

  By the way, among the game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls entered in any winning means and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any prize means Relatively large variations may occur in the ratio, in which case the interest may be reduced. In particular, when the winning means is an open / close winning means that changes state between an open state where the game ball moving the game area can enter and a closed state where the ball can not enter, the open / close winning means Such concerns become even more pronounced as the player's attention works more strongly with regard to entering the ball.

  On the other hand, the game balls can be opened and closed by arranging the plurality of opening and closing winning means together and guiding the game balls to the plurality of opening and closing winning means in order. It is conceivable to increase the possibility of entering the formula winning means. However, in the case where a plurality of opening and closing type winning means are arranged collectively, it is difficult to grasp where the game ball should be made to win (or to which opening and closing type winning means the game ball enters) To be concerned.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and the purpose thereof is that it is difficult to understand the aim of the gaming ball while suppressing the variation in entering the gaming ball into the winning means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a situation.

Means F-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
First openable and closable winning means capable of changing state to an open state permitting entry of the game ball moving in the game area and a closed state restricting entry of the game ball;
It is possible to change the state to an open state, which is arranged downstream of the first opening / closing type winning means and allows the ball to enter the game ball moving in the game area, and a closed state to restrict the ball to enter the game ball. Second opening and closing winning means,
A first winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first opening and closing winning means;
And a second winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second opening-closing winning means,
If the first opening and closing winning means has reached the first ball entry point where it can enter the first opening and closing winning means if the first opening and closing winning means is in the open state, the first opening and closing winning means is in the closed state The game ball that could not enter the first opening and closing winning means because the second opening and closing winning means is in the open state and enters the second opening and closing winning means It has ball entry guide means to guide to the second ball entry point that can be
The second opening / closing winning means is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry guide means,
The entrance benefit is provided at a position corresponding to the entry path of the gaming ball to the first opening / closing winning means (the entering path of the gaming ball that can reliably reach the first opening / closing prize means) A game machine that features it.

  According to the means F-1, the game ball that could not enter the first opening and closing winning means because the first opening and closing winning means is in the closed state is the entry point of the second opening and closing winning means Can be prevented from being discharged from the game area without reaching. As a result, the possibility that the game ball that could not enter the first opening and closing winning means can enter the second opening and closing winning means can be surely enhanced, and the game ball launched in the game area However, it is possible to suppress the situation where the game area is discharged without entering any winning means. As a result, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls entered into any winning means and the number of game balls discharged from the game area without entering any winning means It is possible to suppress the occurrence of relatively large variations in the ratio of, and to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the variations.

  Further, according to the present means 1, since the entrance character is provided at a position corresponding to the entrance path of the game ball to the first opening and closing type winning means, the entrance character moves the game ball, 1 It becomes a mark of where to enter the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means which have been put together. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the target location of the gaming ball is unclear.

  Furthermore, according to the present means 1, the game ball does not pass through the first openable and closable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area, but reaches the second openable and closable prize means located on the downstream side of the game area. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to comply with the order of first entering the first opening and closing winning means, and in the case that it is not good, the second opening and closing winning means may be adhered to, and the first opening and closing prize winning The action and effect such as improving the possibility of entering the ball into the means and the second opening and closing winning means can be more reliably achieved.

  "When the first opening / closing winning means or the second opening / closing winning means is in the open state, all or almost all of the game balls having passed through the entrance prize are The first opening-closing winning means or the second opening-closing winning means may be entered. In addition, “a start winning means capable of changing into an open state that allows entry of the game ball moving in the game area and a closed state that regulates entry of the game ball, a variable winning means, and the game area A normal start means through which moving game balls can pass, a normal start detection means detecting a game ball passing through the normal start means, a start winning detection means detecting a game ball entering the start winning means; Whether or not to generate a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened based on the detection of the start winning detection means, and the variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means; In the configuration, a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not to make the start winning means open is performed based on the detection of the normal start detection means, the first opening-closing type winning Means and the second opening and closing winning combination One of the steps constitutes one of the start winning means and the variable winning means, and the other of the first opening and closing winning means and the second opening and closing winning means is the start winning means and The other of the variable winning means may be configured.

  Means F-2. Means for covering at least the first opening and closing type winning means, the second opening and closing type winning means, and the front entrance of the ball entry guiding means and covering the front of the ball entry guiding means The gaming machine described in F-1.

  According to the means F-2, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the first opening and closing winning means, the second opening and closing winning means, and the ball entry guiding means. That is, the first opening and closing winning means and the first opening and closing winning means, the first opening and closing winning means, and the structure of the ball entering guiding means, and the first opening and closing winning means and the first opening 2 In the state where the opening and closing winning means is opened, if the game ball reaches the entrance character (if the gaming ball enters the part covered by the front decoration portion), the first opening and closing winning means or (2) It can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that one of the opening and closing type winning means enters. In addition, since the portion covered by the front decoration portion is provided with the functions of both the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means, the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means As compared with the conventional gaming machine having a configuration in which means and means exist separately, it is possible to impart novelty and to derive new effects and the like using this.

  In addition, when the front decoration part of this means is provided, it becomes more difficult to know where to enter the game ball with respect to the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means Although the concern is concerned, such concern can be dispelled by the presence of the entrance fitting described in the above means F-1.

  It should be noted that "the front decoration portion may be attached to the game board or the first opening and closing winning means attached to the game board and the second opening and closing win means." In this case, in order to attach the front decoration part, it is not necessary to change the shapes of the game board attachment frame to which the game board is attached and the front frame provided in front of the game board attachment frame. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the gaming machine, such as exchanging only the gaming board and various members attached thereto, and reusing the gaming board attachment frame and the like as it is.

  Furthermore, "the game area behind the front decoration portion may be configured to allow movement of the game ball, and the game ball moving in the area may be configured to be visible". For example, at least a portion where the gaming ball passes the back side, it may be made of a transparent or translucent material, or a slit may be formed. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation where a player or the like who is playing a game for the first time becomes uneasy because he or she does not see what is happening behind the front decoration part. Also, for example, the front decoration may be used as a place for teaching the player predetermined information. For example, the front decoration unit may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning lottery, etc.).

  In addition, since the game ball can pass through the game area behind the front decoration part, the area where the game ball can move (when the game board is viewed from the front) is exchanged in exchange for the front decoration part being installed. It is possible to avoid the situation of being narrowed. Further, "the nail may be formed in the front decoration portion in order to expose the game nail forward". In this case, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball can move behind the front decoration but the game nail can not be installed. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration part so as to avoid the game nail (it is not necessary to arrange the game nail so as to avoid the front decoration part). And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail can be compatible. In addition, even when maintenance (angle adjustment etc.) of the game nail is required due to changes in the angle of the game nail due to long years of use, etc., such work can be performed without removing the front decoration part.

  In addition, “the front decoration part is attached to the first opening / closing winning means attached to the game board and the second opening / closing winning means, and the front decoration part penetrates back and forth, A tool hole may be formed to expose in front the attachment site of the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means to the game board. That is, when the front decoration part is directly attached to the game board with a screw or the like, basically there is a concern that the screw etc. will be exposed to the front to cause a decrease in designability, but the front decoration part can be By attaching to the winning means and the second opening / closing winning means, such attachment can be performed on the back side of the front decorative portion so that a screw or the like used for attachment can not be visually recognized. . However, when such a configuration is adopted, it is feared that the task of attaching the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means to the game board becomes relatively difficult. That is, when the front decoration part also covers the front of the attachment part of the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means to the game board, a tool such as a driver is installed in front of the attachment part. It can not be positioned properly.

  On the other hand, if the tool hole is formed in the front decoration part in the part located in front of the attachment part to the game board of the 1st opening and closing type winning means and the 2nd opening and closing type winning means, the front decoration Even if the unit covers the front of the first opening and closing winning means and the second opening and closing winning means, it is relatively easy to attach the first opening and closing winning means and the second opening and closing winning means to the game board It can be easily performed, and further, the designability is reduced due to visual recognition from the front of the attachment part of the front decoration, the first opening / closing winning means and the second opening / closing prize attachment Can be reduced.

  Means F-3. A game ball moving in the game area enters a portion covered with the front by the front decoration portion, and does not enter either the first opening / closing winning means or the second opening / closing winning means In this case, the gaming machine according to the means F-2 moves to a gaming area not covered by the front decoration part.

  According to the means F-3, the game ball moving in the game area enters the part covered with the front by the front decoration part, but both the first opening type winning means and the second opening type winning means enter It is relatively easy to understand that you did not ball. That is, for example, even when the first openable type winning means and the second openable type winning means are not in the open state, even if the game ball is made to enter the part covered in the front by the front decoration portion, Naturally, the gaming ball has no habit of entering the ball in any of the first and second opening and closing type winning means. At this time, assuming that the game ball which has not entered the first and second opening and closing type winning means continues to move the part covered with the front decoration until it is discharged out of the game area, the first and second It is difficult to visually identify which of the second opening and closing type winning means has won, or neither.

  In this respect, the game ball which has entered the part covered by the front decoration but has not entered either the first opening / closing winning means or the second opening / closing winning means is again used by the front decoration. It is configured to move to an uncovered gaming area. Therefore, when the first opening and closing winning means and the second opening and closing winning means are not in the open state, or when the game ball temporarily clogs the game ball in the entry route, etc. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a trouble caused by misunderstanding that there is no prize ball (payout of the game ball) for entering into the covered portion, a decrease in interest, or the like.

  Means F-4. In the front decoration portion, a confirmation hole penetrating back and forth is formed corresponding to the game ball path through which the game ball can pass behind, as described in the means F-2 or F-3 Of gaming machines.

  According to the means F-4, it is possible to more easily recognize the presence of the game ball moving behind the front decoration part. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the anxiety of the player (such as a beginner) who is anxious about where the gaming ball moved to the rear of the front decoration part has gone.

  Note that “the front decoration portion may be formed with a ball clogging eliminating hole penetrating back and forth corresponding to a game ball path through which the game ball can pass behind.” In this case, even if ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decoration part, it can be eliminated through the ball clogging eliminating hole without removing the front decoration part.

  Means F-5. A game machine according to any one of the means F-1 to F-4, characterized in that it comprises an accessory driving means capable of changing the state of the entrance character.

  According to the means F-5, the decorativeness and the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by changing the state of the entrance character, the mark can be made more noticeable as a mark (target) of the launch position of the game ball, or predetermined information can be suggested and taught by the state change.

  In addition, with "change in the state of the entrance character", it means the displacement of the entrance character, the aspect change of the display member such as the electric decoration provided in the entrance character (for example, the entrance character imitates a predetermined character and The three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes according to the situation, and the like. In addition, as the displacement of the entrance character, not only when the entire entrance character is displaceable, but also the entrance character is displaceable partially (one or more may be possible). The case is included.

Means F-6. The inlet part is at least partially displaceable,
The gaming machine according to the means F-5, wherein the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area is not changed even if the entrance character is displaced.

  According to the means F-6, the entrance character is a character (ornament) and is displaceable, but the displacement does not affect the movement path of the gaming ball. For this reason, even if the entrance character is moved in a complicated manner, etc., it is possible to well enter the game ball into the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means, and relatively freely designed. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the entry part that can also be done.

  Note that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet character". In this case, it is possible to avoid the increase in size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring so as not to change the movement path of the gaming ball with displacement of the entrance accessory. Also, “a first drive means for changing the state of the first opening / closing winning means to the open state and a state of the closing state, and a second driving means for changing the state of the second opening / closing winning means to the open state and the closed state And the entrance product is interlocked with the opening / closing operation of one of the first opening / closing winning means and the second opening / closing winning means, and the item is driven by the first driving means or the second driving means. The means may be configured as “. In this case, the displacement control of the entrance part can be simplified.

Means F-7. A first entering possible state where entering the ball into the first opening and closing winning means can be expected, and a first entering impossible state where the entering into the first opening and closing winning means can not be expected are set.
A second entering possible state where entering the ball into the second opening and closing winning means can be expected, and a second entering impossible state where the entering into the second opening and closing winning means can not be expected are set.
The entry role has a first corresponding state corresponding to the first ball entry possible state, a second corresponding state corresponding to the second ball entry possible state, and a normal corresponding state corresponding to the other states. The gaming machine according to the means F-5 or F-6 characterized in that the state change is possible.

  According to the means F-7, depending on the aspect of the entrance character, it is possible to enter either the first opening-closing winning means or the second opening-closing winning means, or both of the gaming balls are allowed to enter depending on the aspect of the entrance prize. It is possible to understand if it is not in a state. The operation pattern of the entrance combination when changing from the normal correspondence state to the first correspondence state, and the movement of the entrance combination when changing from the normal correspondence state to the second correspondence state A plurality of patterns may be present. In this case, the behavior of the entrance character can be used more effectively as the effect.

  Means F-8. Means F-1 to F characterized by comprising destination detection means for detecting the passing game ball in the entry path of the game ball to the first opening / closing type winning means covered forward by the entrance character The gaming machine according to any one of -7.

  According to the means F-8, it is to the game ball having entered the area covered with the entrance character serving as the entrance for the game ball to enter the first opening-closing type winning means and the second opening-closing type winning means Reaction can be generated relatively quickly, in which case, the game ball is in the area where the first opening and closing winning means and the second opening and closing winning means are put together (the area where the front decoration part such as the means F-2 exists) Can strengthen the image that has entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter either the first opening / closing winning means or the second opening / closing winning means by entering (entering) the game ball into the entrance character (the back side thereof). It can be made to recognize more surely.

  Furthermore, until the game ball is detected by the first prize detection means or the second prize detection means (in particular, the second prize detection means located on the downstream side of the game area) after the game ball enters the entrance character. There is concern that a relatively long time lag will occur, and even if the notification of ball entry is performed at the timing of detection by the first prize detection means or the second prize detection means, It becomes difficult to grasp what the notification corresponds to, and the player feels uneasy if there is no reaction when entering the entrance character. This concern can be eliminated by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the front detection means.

  Further, in the case where there are a plurality of moving routes of the game ball in the game area, and the player targets the moving route of the target to hit the game ball according to the situation such as the game mode etc. In a situation where the moving route in which the winning means and the second opening / closing winning means are installed is not the target moving route, it can be more reliably grasped that the game ball has been hit to the moving route, It is also possible to perform notification etc. which show the correct movement route based on.

  Means F-9. A game machine according to means F-8, comprising: an entry effect sound generation means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the first detection means.

  According to the means F-9, it is possible to further intensify the image that the gaming ball has entered the entrance character. In addition, the player can feel a sense of security because it can be understood that the gaming ball that has entered the entrance character is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side.

  Means F-10. A means F-- characterized by comprising discharge detection means for detecting a game ball which has not entered any of the start winning means and the variable winning means among the game balls detected by the first detecting means. The gaming machine described in 8 or F-9.

  According to the means F-10, based on detection information of the first detection means, the start winning detection means, the variable winning detection means, and the discharge detection means, there are no incorrect entering balls, the start winning means, the variable winning means, And, it can be checked whether ball clogging has occurred in the ball entry guide means.

Means F-11. The number of gaming balls entered in the first opening and closing winning means in the first gaming state in which the first opening and closing winning means is in the open state, or the number of balls received according to the entering number of the playing balls A first display means capable of displaying the number of gaming balls, and
In the second gaming state in which the second opening and closing winning means is opened, the number of game balls entered into the second opening and closing winning means, or the number of balls entered in the game ball is paid out A game machine according to any one of the means F-1 to F-10, comprising at least one of second display means capable of displaying the number of game balls.

  According to the means F-11, the game ball which has entered the entrance character enters the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means, and is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side. There is a sense of security from knowing that

  Note that “displayed by the first display means or the second display means based on the information on whether or not the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the detection information of the destination detection means A value other than the value displayed by the first display means or the second display means is configured to be able to change (update) the numerical value and based on the detection information of the first prize detection means and the second prize detection means. It may be configured to be changeable. That is, for example, when the gaming ball enters the entrance prize while in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, almost all of the gaming balls enter the first opening type winning means or the second opening type winning means Even in the configuration where the ball is made, when the gaming ball is detected by the first detection means, the game ball does not actually enter the first opening and closing type winning means and the second opening and closing type winning means. At this time, when making the first detection means or the second display means count in response to the first detection means, the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection means and then enters the corresponding open-close winning means If you did not throw the ball (it happened that you entered the open-close winning means upstream on the upstream side before entering the open-close winning prize means on the downstream side) (It is preferable not to be such arrangement) The player has reached the upper limit of the number of ball entry of the game ball, and so on) and so on, judging that it is not necessary to fire the game ball anymore, and stopping the game ball from being fired As a result, there is concern that the player may suffer a loss or the like. In this respect, the above-mentioned problem can be avoided by displaying the number of entering balls in the opening and closing type winning means by the first display means and the second display means.

  Means F-12. A game machine according to any one of the means F-1 to F-11, wherein a flow control means for adjusting the movement direction and movement speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the entrance character.

  According to the means F-12, the movement direction and movement of the game ball entering the entrance character by providing the rectifying means for adjusting the movement direction and the movement speed of the game ball before the game ball reaches the entrance character Irregularities in speed can be reduced. Therefore, the flow of the game balls in the entrance character, the first and second opening and closing winning means, and the ball guiding means can be made relatively smooth. Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

  G. Conventionally, for example, pachinko machines and the like have been known as a type of game machine. The pachinko machine is configured to play a game using a game ball, and to have a game area in which the game ball can move, and to guide the game ball fired by the launcher to the game area. Also, in general, pachinko machines are provided with various winning means capable of entering game balls moving in the game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

  By the way, in order to make the game ball hit in the game area enter the winning means efficiently, in the specific area where the game ball moving in the game area can enter, the game ball entered in the specific area can enter the ball It is conceivable to provide a plurality of winning means in In other words, by limiting the movement path of the gaming ball to a certain extent, the possibility of entering the winning means is enhanced, and further, for example, the gaming ball is against the plurality of winning means (the upstream side is openable and closable) When configured to be guided in order, it is possible to more efficiently enter the game ball into the winning means.

  However, a relatively large time lag may occur between the game ball entering the specific area and the winning means, and there is no reaction even though the game ball should have entered the specific area, or When a reaction which is not performed (which is taken in a bad meaning) is derived, there is a concern that the player may feel discomfort or distrust.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its object is to make it possible to progress the game more suitably in a configuration having a specific area in which a plurality of winning means are arranged. It is in providing a gaming machine.

Means G-0. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
A specific area to which a game ball moving in the game area can enter (in the fifth embodiment, a rear area of the right-handed winning unit 901 in the game area);
First winning means (in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b) capable of entering game balls moving in the specific area;
Second winning means (in the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b) capable of entering game balls moving in the specific area;
A first winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second start winning switch 224b) for detecting the gaming ball having entered the first winning means;
Second winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second count switch 223b) for detecting the gaming ball having entered the second winning means;
A variable display means (in the fifth embodiment, a decorative symbol display device 42) capable of changing and displaying identification information;
When detection is performed, at least one of the first winning detection means and the second winning detection means performs a ball-entering detection corresponding process (in the fifth embodiment, the hold icon 962 is displayed corresponding to the detection). Configured as an object detection unit (in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning detection switch 224b) that executes the process
The destination detection means (in the fifth embodiment, the entry detection switch 941 in the fifth embodiment) is provided upstream of the target detection means in the specific area and capable of detecting a game ball moving in the specific area,
The game ball detected by the first detection means is configured to be able to enter the first winning means or the second winning means corresponding to the object detecting means,
When the detection by the point detection unit is performed, it is configured to be able to execute a first insertion detection response process (in the fifth embodiment, a process for displaying the pseudo hold icon 963) related to the ball detection response process. A game machine characterized by

  According to the means G-0, the process related to the ball drop detection corresponding process performed based on the detection of the object detection means (first ball drop detection corresponding process) is detected by the point detection means disposed upstream of the object detection means It is supposed to be done on the basis of For this reason, it is possible to perform an effect (indication, etc.) such that detection of the object detection means may be performed (a ball entry detection handling process may be executed), and diversification of the effect can be achieved. . Also, a reaction corresponding to the detection of the object detection means can be derived quickly. Therefore, the object detection means is disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and there is a time lag between the game ball entering the specific area and the reaction corresponding to the detection of the object detection means being performed. It is possible to eliminate the concern that it is difficult to know what the reaction corresponds to, or that the subject detection means is unsure whether the detection is performed properly. In particular, “enter the specific area at a specific timing, and the gaming ball detected by the tip detection means enters the first winning means or the second winning means corresponding to the target detecting means. In the case of “being configured in the above”, such an action and effect will be further achieved.

Means G-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
A specific area to which a game ball moving in the game area can enter (in the fifth embodiment, a rear area of the right-handed winning unit 901 in the game area);
First winning means (in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b) capable of entering game balls moving in the specific area;
The second winning means (in the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b) is configured such that a game ball moving in the specific area can enter the ball, and is arranged downstream of the first winning means on the downstream side of the specific area. )When,
A first winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second start winning switch 224b) for detecting the gaming ball having entered the first winning means;
Second winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second count switch 223b) for detecting the gaming ball having entered the second winning means;
A variable display means (in the fifth embodiment, a decorative symbol display device 42) capable of changing and displaying identification information;
When at least one of the first winning detection means and the second winning detection means is detected, the variable display means displays the ball entry detection corresponding display corresponding to the detection (in the fifth embodiment, Configured as a display target detection unit (in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning detection switch 224b) that derives the hold icon 962);
The device further comprises a destination detection means (in the fifth embodiment, an entrance detection switch 941) arranged upstream of the first winning means in the specific area and capable of detecting a game ball moving in the specific area,
The game ball detected by the first detection means is configured to be able to enter the first winning means or the second winning means corresponding to the display object detecting means,
When the detection of the tip detection means is performed, the first display detection correspondence display of an aspect different from the entrance detection correspondence display imitating the entrance detection correspondence display in the variable display means (in the fifth embodiment (in the fifth embodiment) , Configured to be able to derive the pseudo hold icon 963),
When the display object detection means is detected in the state where the first-in-place ball detection correspondence display is displayed, instead of the first-in-degree ball detection correspondence display in the variable display means, the first-in ball detection correspondence display A game machine characterized by being derived.

  According to the means G-1, until the game ball enters the specific area and enters the first winning means or the second winning means, the first winning detection means or the second winning detection means (display target detection Even in the case where a relatively long time lag occurs before detection by means), the game ball entering the specific area is disposed upstream of the first prize detection means The first entering ball detection corresponding display imitating the ball entering detection corresponding display to be displayed on the variable display means when the display object detecting means is detected at the stage detected by the detecting means is configured to be derived ing. That is, although the game ball enters the specific area, there is no reaction to it, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving an anxiety such as whether it makes any sense to enter the game ball into the specific area. It is possible to suppress a situation where the player does not realize that the player has entered the game ball into the first winning means or the second winning means. Therefore, in a configuration having a specific area in which a plurality of winning means are arranged, it is possible to make progress of a more suitable game.

  In addition, based on the detection of the first detection means, the detection of the display object detection means may be performed (a suggestion such as displaying the ball entry detection corresponding display may be displayed). Can be diversified. It should be noted that the player can recognize that “the ball entry detection corresponding display is derived instead of the first ball entry detection correspondence display” is switched to the ball entry detection corresponding display. In the case where the display position is the same or the first-in-first-margin detection correspondence display is displaced, for example, the display may be made such that the movement is linked. . In addition, "a different form from the above-mentioned display for detecting entering a ball" means that not only when the shape, pattern, hue, etc. are different, but also when the same outer shape has a different movement.

Means G-2. The first winning means and the second winning means can be opened and closed in such a manner that the game ball moving in the specific area is allowed to enter the closed state and the closed state is restricted to enter the game ball. It is a winning means of the ceremony,
The first winning means is closed even though it has reached the first entry point where the first winning means can enter the first winning means if the first winning means is open. The second ball entry point where it is possible to enter the second winning means if the second winning means is in the open state and the game ball which could not enter the first winning means because the Equipped with ball entry guide means for guiding to
The second winning means is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry guide means,
The first open state in which the first winning means is in an open state, the second open state in which the second winning means is in an open state, and the first open state or the second open state And state determination means for determining which of the states it is in,
In the open state where detection of the game ball by the display object detection means can be expected among the first open state and the second open state, when the detection of the first detection means is performed, the first-in-the-ball detection correspondence display is derived And
A means G-, which is configured so as not to derive the first-in first-out ball detection corresponding display when the detection of the first detection means is performed in the other open state or the normal state. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the means G-2, the game ball entering the specific area is detected by the display object detection means, and the entry detection correspondence display may be derived only when there is a possibility that the first detection based on the detection of the first detection means A ball detection correspondence indication is configured to be derived. Therefore, for example, although the first-in-first-place ball detection correspondence display is displayed due to the first-in-first-place ball detection correspondence display being derived based on the detection of the first detection means even in the normal state, A display mode is derived in which the first-in-first-row detection correspondence display itself is also erased without being switched and displayed, and the situation that the player is confused or gives the player an unpleasant feeling is more assured Can be prevented. In this manner, the player enters the game ball into the specific area in the predetermined opening state, thereby corresponding to entering the winning means corresponding to the predetermined opening state (the ball entering the corresponding winning means is expected Since the reaction is derived, it is possible to further strengthen the (simulated) feeling that the game ball for the player is made to win in the winning means and, in turn, the game is progressed.

  Means G-3. A means for detecting the game ball discharged from the specific area without entering the specific area and entering the first winning means and the second winning means; The gaming machine according to G-1 or G-2.

  According to the means G-3, it is possible to grasp the number (increase or decrease) of gaming balls existing in the specific area. That is, in the state where the first-in-place ball detection correspondence display is displayed, the detection of the winning detection means of the first winning detection means and the second winning detection means which do not correspond to the display object detection means or the discharge detection means If it is, it is possible to delete (one) the ball entry detection correspondence display. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the first-in-place ball detection correspondence display continues to be displayed on the variable display means even though there is no possibility of being switched and displayed on the ball entry detection correspondence display.

  Means G-4. A gaming machine according to any one of the means G-1 to G-3, further comprising: an entry effect sound generation means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the first detection means.

  According to the means G-4, the reaction to the game ball entering the specific area can be increased, and the player is more surely recognized that it makes sense to cause the game ball to enter the specific area. Can. Incidentally, corresponding to the means G-2, if the first open state, the sound effect corresponding to the ball entering the first winning means, if the second open state corresponds to the ball entering the second winning means In the case of the normal state, the sound effect may be set to no sound effect.

Means G-5. When the first-in-the-ball detection corresponding display is displayed, an additional display different from the first-in-the-ball detection corresponding display is displayed in such a manner as to overlap at least a part of the first-in-the-ball detection corresponding display
When the entry detection detection display is derived instead of the first entry detection detection correspondence display, the additional display that is displayed corresponding to the first entry detection detection display is erased. A gaming machine according to any one of the means G-1 to G-4.

  According to the means G-5, by setting the mode of the first-in first-out ball detection correspondence display as the mode in which at least a part is not clarified, the first-in-first-hand detection correspondence display mode is not determined. It can strongly give the impression that there is a possibility of further change in the correspondence display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player confuses the detection of the first-in-first-round detection with the display of the first detection of ball, and occurs when the first-in-hand detection display is mistaken for the second display. Possible problems (For example, although only the first-in first-out detection correspondence display has been performed, the process that can be executed when the second detection display corresponding display is performed by mistaking it as the first appearance detection-corresponding display is not executed It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as that.

  It should be noted that “a detection history storage unit capable of storing the detection history of the destination detection unit (time of each detection) and the detection history of the display object detection unit (time of each detection) is provided. May be configured to be able to output. That is, for example, if a trouble occurs by misinterpreting the first-in-first-place ball detection correspondence display with the first-in-class detection correspondence display, etc., data can be reliably obtained when explaining the circumstances (for example, display by variable display means) This can be done or sent to a hall computer), and the situation that the trouble is broken can be avoided. In addition, detection history of the prize detection means which is provided in the specific area but is not the target display object detection means, and detection history of the discharge detection means of the means G-3 are also detected in the detection history storage means. Each may be configured to be storable (individually).

Means G-6. The first-in ball detection corresponding display has an aspect such that the first-in ball detection corresponding display itself continues to be displaced,
In the case where the ball entry detection corresponding display is derived instead of the first-in-place ball detection correspondence display, the front of the stopped or substantially stopped aspect at the position where the first ball entry detection correspondence display is displayed A game machine according to any one of the means G-1 to G-5, characterized in that a writing ball detection corresponding display is derived.

  According to the means G-6, the first-in first-out ball detection corresponding display is in an operating mode, and the in-light-in-pocket detection corresponding display is in a stopped or substantially stopped mode, whereby the player is first-in-first ball detection compatible. It is possible to suppress the situation where the display and the entry detection correspondence display are mixed up. Therefore, basically the same function and effect as those of the above-mentioned means G-5 can be obtained.

  Means G-7. A gaming machine according to any one of the means G-1 to G-6, wherein a transparent front decoration part is provided so as to cover the front of the specific area.

  According to the means G-7, the sense of unity in the specific area can be enhanced, and the entire specific area including the first winning means and the second winning means can be impressed as a winning unit. For this reason, when aiming at either the first winning means or the second winning means, the game image is simplified so as to aim at a relatively large target such as a specific area, so that it is easy to play the game without thinking difficult Can be enjoyed.

  Moreover, when the front decoration portion is provided, although it is transparent (made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, or the openings are formed in a lattice shape, etc.), the visibility of the specific area is Declines somewhat. In other words, it becomes somewhat difficult to confirm whether the game ball entering the specific area enters the first winning means or the second winning means, and as a result, it observes a part other than the entrance of the specific area Opportunities are also easily reduced. In this point, as in the above-mentioned means G-1, the game ball enters the specific area immediately after the game ball enters the specific area without directly visually recognizing and checking the inside of the specific area. It can be grasped only by visually observing the variable display means that the ball detection correspondence display or the processing corresponding to this is performed.

Means G-8. Start winning means capable of changing state between an open state permitting entry of the game ball moving in the game area and a closed state restricting entry of the game ball;
Start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the start winning means;
Main control means for generating a special gaming state on the basis of the result of the success or failure lottery, while performing a success or failure lottery whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning detection means ,
A gaming machine comprising: display control means for variably displaying identification information in the variable display means, and for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the acceptance lottery after a predetermined time.
The main control means
Random number generation means of success or failure used for the said success or failure lottery,
A winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success or failure random number generation means as the value to be won in the success or failure lottery,
And a reserve storage area having a plurality of reserve areas capable of storing variation information used to determine the content of the variation display in the variable display means.
Discriminant value extraction processing for extracting the value of the pass / fail random number generation means based on the detection of the start winning detection means;
Discrimination value storage processing for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the discrimination value extraction processing in any one of the suspension areas of the suspension storage area;
A first propriety determination process of determining whether or not the value of the yes / no random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches the value stored in the win value storage means;
A result storage process for storing the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number generation means as the fluctuation information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second success or failure determination process of determining whether to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
The configuration is capable of executing variable display setting processing for setting the variable display based on the result of the second success / failure determination processing,
One of the first winning means and the second winning means is constituted by the start winning means,
The display object detection unit is configured by the start winning detection unit.
The variable display means displays a hold information object indicating that change information is stored in each hold area of the hold storage area,
The entry detection object correspondence display is configured by the hold information object,
The variable display means is configured to be able to derive a pseudo holding information object as the first-in-first-hand ball detection correspondence display imitating the holding information object when the detection of the first detection means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the means G-1 to G-7.

  According to the means G-8, since the pending storage area has a plurality of pending areas and the values of the random number generating means etc. related to the setting of the variable display can be stored a plurality of times, the variable display is consequently suspended It will be done. Further, in this means, when the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the hold storage area, the result of the success / failure lottery etc. can be grasped, so that the contents of the change display are It can be taught and suggested to the player. Therefore, for example, when the new variable display is suspended when the variable display is already suspended, the new suspended display is performed before the variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display is suspended. The content of the corresponding variable display can be taught and suggested in the holding information displayed based on the new holding of the variable display when the previously-displayed variable display is performed. In this case, the presentation can be improved.

  Now, for example, when the game ball is made to enter the specific area in the specific state (the first open state or the first open state), the game ball substantially enters the start winning means, the game ball is, If there is a relatively long time lag between entering the specific area and entering the starting winning means provided in the specific area and being detected by the display object detecting means, the gaming ball is truly the starting winning means There is concern that you will be anxious about entering the

  In this respect, in this means, the entering detection correspondence display is configured by the holding information object, and the gaming ball is in the specific area (for example, in a high entering state where the gaming ball can enter the start winning means in the specific area). In the case where the entry detection means detects an entry into the point detection means, the false hold information object as the first-in-first-in-place ball detection correspondence display is displayed when the detection of the point detection means is performed. Therefore, the player has the right to execute the variable display by the game ball entering the specific area shortly after the game ball enters the specific area (at the stage when the game ball enters the specific area) You can almost understand what you can get. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to understand the correspondence between the game ball entering the specific area and the result (such as its benefits).

Means G-9. The pending information object is
A pre-decision parts part in which a pattern is determined based on a result of a lottery performed triggered by the detection of the destination detection means;
It has a later-decided parts unit in which a pattern is determined based on the result of a lottery performed triggered by the detection of the start winning detection means,
The gaming machine according to the means G-8, wherein the pseudo holding information object is constituted by the predetermined parts.

  According to the means G-9, it is possible to improve the effect of using the hold information object and the pseudo hold object. In addition, the pattern of the post-decision parts part is determined by referring to the result of the lottery and the pattern of the pre-decision parts part, and the combination of the pre-decision parts part and the post-decision parts part makes the special game state The expectation of winning to the occurrence of the event may change. In this case, the holding information object and the pseudo holding information object can be more strongly interested.

Means G-10. Variable winning means capable of changing state between an open state permitting entry of the game ball moving in the game area and a closed state restricting entry of the game ball;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a lottery for whether or not to generate a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is in an open state is performed, and the main for causing the special gaming state based on the result of the corresponding lottery. In a gaming machine provided with control means,
One of the first winning means and the second winning means is comprised of the variable winning means,
The display object detection unit is configured by the variable winning detection unit.
The variable display means derives a count display for counting detection information of the variable winning detection means,
The count display displays the ball entry detection support display,
The variable display means is configured to be able to derive a pseudo count display as the first-in-first-place ball detection correspondence display imitating the count display when the detection by the first detection means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of G-1 to G-9.

  According to the means G-10, for example, if the game ball is made to enter the specific area in the special gaming state in which the variable winning means in the specific area is in the open state, (almost) the game ball enters the variable winning means In such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation where a game ball enters a specific area, but there is no reaction to the approach of the game ball, and it is not possible to know what kind of benefit is provided. It is possible to give the feeling that the game ball has been entered into the variable winning means.

  Means H. "Starting winning means and variable winning means" of the above means D, "game member or winning means (starting winning means and variable winning means) of the above means E," first opening and closing winning means and first of the above means F 2) The "first winning means and the second winning means" of the above-mentioned means G are constituted by the specific winning opening described in the above means A2 or means A3, the opening / closing member, and the ball entering opportunity giving means Configured by any one of the winning means, the special winning opening described in the above means B, the opening / closing member, and the ball entering opportunity giving means, and the variable winning means described in the above means C A game machine characterized by

  Below, the basic composition of the various game machines to which each said means is applied is shown.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means A ball game machine having a game area in which the game balls are guided and ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) disposed in the game area can be mentioned.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above-described means is a ball game machine having a gaming area extending substantially in the vertical direction. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means Game balls are guided, and a predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, A ball game machine having a variable winning device, an operation opening, etc.) and configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means, or each of the ballistic gaming machines, is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

  10: Pachinko machine, 32a: first variable winning device, 32b: second variable winning device, 33a: first starting winning device, 33b, second starting winning device, 34: through gate, 42: decorative symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R ... 2nd special display device, 46 ... reserve lamp, 223a, 223b ... count switch, 224a, 224b ... start winning switch, 225 ... through gate switch, 261 ... main controller, 262 ... sub Control device.

Claims (2)

Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
A state that allows the ball entrance of game ball to move game area, and a first prize means a state can change in the impossible state to preclude ball entrance of game ball,
A state changeable between a permitted state arranged downstream of the first winning means and allowing a game ball moving in the game area to enter the ball and a restricted state restricting the game ball entering the ball 2 winning means,
A first winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first winning means;
And a second winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second winning means,
Despite the first prize means reaches the first ball entrance points that can be ball entrance to the first prize means if said state, since the first prize means was the impossible state the game balls that could not be ball entrance to the first prize means, until the second ball entrance point the second prize means can be ball entrance to the second prize means if the allowable state It has a ball entry guide means for guiding
An accessory provided at a position corresponding to the entry route of the game ball to the first winning means,
A game machine characterized by further comprising: an article driving means capable of changing the state of the prize according to a winning state of the first winning means .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images